You are on page 1of 303

REG - D

REG-D Relay for Voltage Control


& Transformer Monitoring

Operating Manual

Issue 12.02.2009/03a
Software Version

R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

Issue GB
Version 02.2009
REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring
Operating Manual
Issue 12.02.2009
Copyright 2009 by A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG.
All rights reserved.

Published by:
A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG
Frankenstrae 160
90461 Nuremberg, Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 911 / 62 81 08 - 0
Fax No.: +49 (0) 911 / 62 81 08 -96
e-mail: info@a-eberle.de
Internet: www.a-eberle.de, www.regsys.de
The company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG cannot be held liable for
any damages or losses resulting from printing errors or changes
in this operating manual.
Furthermore, A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG does not assume
responsibility for any damages and losses resulting from
defective devices or from devices altered by the user.

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Table of Contents
1

Warnings and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Scope of Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.1

Plug-in modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.2

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.4

Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8

Block diagram of socket connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Socket connector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket connector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket connector 4; (measuring current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket connector 5; (tap changing via feature T1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket connector 6; (analogue inputs / outputs; interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface COM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5

Installation in the mounting rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

20
22
24
28
29
30
33
35

3.6

Wall-mounted housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.5.1

Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel mounting enclosure, type 30 MW, feature B05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel mounting enclosure, type 49 MW, feature B06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall-mounted housing, type 49 MW, feature B07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 mounting rack, feature B92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7

Pin assignment for types B05, B06 and B07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

37
37
38
38
39
36

4.1

The front panel operator interface of the REG-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Plug connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2

Operating principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.3

Selecting the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.4

Lamp check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.5

Resetting fault signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.6

Operating the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

5.1

Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5.2

Transducer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5.3

Recorder mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

5.4

Statistics mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

5.5

Paragramer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

5.6

Choosing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5.7

Setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5.8

Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

5.9

Time behaviour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

5.10

Backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

5.11

Tap-changer running time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5.12

Knx transformer mounting ratios and transformer connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.13

Setting the nominal current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.14

Inhibit low limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

5.15

Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

5.16

Short description of the individual limit values, the setpoint values and the permissible regulative
deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

6.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9

Station name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88


Setting the time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
LCD contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Deleting recorder data (resetting the measured value memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Deleting tap-change sums (resetting the tap-counter to zero). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Actual value correction of the measuring voltage UE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Actual value correction of the measuring current IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.2

RS-232 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

6.2.1
6.2.2

COM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
COM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

6.3

E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

6.4

PAN-D voltage monitoring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

6.5

Status (actual ID data of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring). . . . . . 99

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7

Parameterisation of the REG-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

7.1

Permissible regulative deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

7.2

Time behaviour (regulation behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3

Time factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103


Time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

7.3

Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

7.3.1
7.3.2

1st setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105


Further setpoint values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

7.4

Programs (parameters for parallel transformer regulation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

7.4.1
7.4.2
7.2.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5

Selection of the parallel programs (regulation programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Parameters for the parallel program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current influence (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDC parameter R (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDC parameter X (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5

Gradient (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.6

Limitation (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.7

< U Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.8

> U Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

107
108
104
110
110
110

7.9

> I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

7.10

Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value of the voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

7.11

High-speed switching during undervoltage/overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

7.11.1
7.11.2

High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs (RAISE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114


High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs (LOWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

7.12

Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs . . . 115

7.13

Time delays (limit signals). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

7.13.1
7.13.2
7.13.3
7.13.4
7.13.5
7.13.6
7.13.7

Time Delay > U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Time delay < U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay > I, < I limit value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay forward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay inhibit low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REG - D Operating Manual

115
116
116
116
117
117
118

REG - D
7.14

Add-Ons (Relay behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

7.14.1
7.14.2
7.14.3
7.14.4
7.14.5
7.14.6
7.14.7
7.14.8
7.14.9
7.14.10
7.14.11
7.14.12
7.14.13
7.14.14
7.14.15
7.14.16
7.14.17
7.14.18

Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118


Maximum time TC in operation (motor drive running time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Manual/Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Tap-changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Self-Conduction of the operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Current Display (of the Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
LCD saver (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Regulator mode: large display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Parallel Program Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Up/down relay on time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Setpoint adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Creeping net breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Limit base (reference value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Setting the Relay to inhibit low if <I or >I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Maximum tap difference (monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
PARAGRAMER activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

7.15

Transformer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

7.15.1
7.15.2
7.15.3
7.15.4
7.15.5

Transformer configuration voltage (conductor connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132


Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Transformer mounting current (conductor connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Transformer mounting ratio for the current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

7.16

Input assignments (binary inputs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

7.17

Relay assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

7.18

LED assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Measurement Value Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

8.1

Setting the simulated voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.2

Setting the simulated current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.3

Setting the simulated phase angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.4

Setting the simulated tap-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Parallel Operation of Transformers with REG-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

9.1

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

9.2

Programs for parallel operation and their prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3

Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Preparing manual activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Preparing automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

9.3

Parallel operation using the Master-Slave-Independent (MSI) procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

9.3.1

Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
10

Resistance Measuring Equipment for Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded TapChange Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

10.1

Error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

10.2

Level detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

10.3

Connection options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

11

mA inputs, mA outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

11.1

Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

11.2

Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

12

Updating the Operating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

12.1

Preparing the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

12.1.1

Windows NT/2000/XP operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

12.2

Starting the bootstrap loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

13

Updating Analogue Inputs, Outputs, Tap-Change Potentiometer Input. . . . . . . . . . 215

14

Maintenance and Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

14.1

Cleaning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

14.2

Changing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

14.3

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

14.4

REG-D current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

15

Storage Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

16

Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

16.1

Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

16.2

Command variable W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3

Fixed command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222


Variable command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Current-dependent setpoint value increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

16.3

Summary and Examples for Current Influencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

16.4

Regulative deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

16.4.1
16.4.2
16.4.3
16.4.4

Regulative deviation Xw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the permissible regulative deviation Xw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233
233
234
234

16.5

Monitoring extreme operation values (faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

16.5.1

Limit signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.6

Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

16.6.1
16.6.2
16.6.3
16.6.4
16.6.5

High-speed switching Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240


Relay inhibit low function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Measuring the Creeping Net Breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Add-On: monitoring the maximum tap-change difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Add-On: monitoring the tap-changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

16.7

Time behaviour of the Relay when a control command is output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

16.7.1
16.7.2
16.7.3
16.7.4
16.7.5

Determining the reaction delay tv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247


Integrated time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Const time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Setting the time factor Ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

16.8

E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

16.9

Voltage regulation with parallel-switched transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

16.9.1
16.9.2
16.9.3
16.9.4
16.9.5

Regulation programs for transformers switched in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263


Functional principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Influence of the circulating current regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Activation of the regulation program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Description of the regulation programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

16.10 Nominal transformation of the measuring transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281


16.11 Self-conduct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
16.12 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
16.12.1 LCD contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
16.12.2 LCD saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
16.12.3 Background illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

17

Definition of the Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

18

Symbols and their Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

19

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

20

Notes on the Interpreter Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

21

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

22

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
1

Warnings and Information

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


is exclusively designed for implementation in systems and
equipment incorporating electrical energy technology on which
only trained experts are permitted to carry out all required work.
Experts are persons who are familiar with the installation,
mounting, commissioning and operation of these types of
products. Furthermore, experts have qualifications which
comply with their field of work.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
has been designed and tested in accordance with all important
electrical safety regulations and left the factory in perfect
condition. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, the following instructions and warnings in this
operating manual must be observed.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring has been designed to comply with IEC 10110/
EN61010 (DIN VDE 0411), degree of protection I and was
tested according to this standard before delivery.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring must be earthed via a protective earth
conductor. This condition is fulfilled when the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is connected to
an auxiliary voltage with a protective earth conductor
(European power supply system). If the auxiliary voltage
power supply system does not have a protective earth
conductor, an additional connection must be established
from the protective earth conductor terminal to earth.

The upper limit of the permissible auxiliary voltage UAUX may


not be exceeded, neither permanently nor for a short period
of time.

Before changing the fuse, separate the REG-D Relay for


Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring completely from
the auxiliary voltage UAUX.
The use of fuses other than those of the indicated type and
rated current is prohibited.

A REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring which displays visible damage or clear
malfunctioning must not be used and has to be secured
against unintentionally being switched on.
REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Maintenance and repair work on an opened REG-D Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring may only be
carried out by authorised experts.

Warning signs

Please familiarise yourself with the nominal insulation voltage of


the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring before
connecting the device.
Ensure that the voltages are connected via a disconnecting
mechanism, and that the current path can be short circuited if
there is a device fault to enable problem-free device
replacement.
This is only required if the device, including the device housing/
mounting rack, has to be disassembled. If the plug-in modules
alone are removed, the short circuit plug prevents the circuits
from being used whilst open.
When wiring, please ensure that the conductors are either
bound short or kept sufficiently short, so that they can neither
come into contact with the connecting elements (plugs,
terminals etc.) nor the stripped conductor ends of circuits with
a low nominal insulation voltage. If this is not ensured, a selffeeding voltage may form when an error occur, turning the
originally safe low voltage circuits (e.g. mA outputs) into ones
that are dangerous if touched.

10

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
2

Scope of Delivery

1 REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


1 short-form operating manual in English
1 operating manual in English
1 WinREG programming and parameterisation software
1 cable
1 replacement fuse

REG - D Operating Manual

11

REG - D
3

Technical Data

3.1

Plug-in modules

Front panel

Plastic film on aluminium support


RAL 7035 light grey

Height

3 U (128.5 mm)

Width

28 T (142.2 mm)

Weight

1.5 kg

Degree of protection
Plug-in modules
Socket connector

IP00
IP00

Configuration

according to DIN 41494 Part 5

Plug-in connector

DIN 41612

Dimensions

R E G

- D
F 1
F 2

3 U

F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

1 2

12

1 7 3 .5

lo c a l
r e m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

2 28
8 T MW
E

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

LP-REG-NTZ

Location of
blade connectors

20,32

LP-REG-EA

20,32

7,62

LP-REG-REL

15,24
40,64

142,2

4
LP-REG-STU
optional

5
45,72

Analogue module

LP-REG-CPU
12

173,5

5 M W

9 M W
d

b
2

d
b

4 M W

3 M W

z
d

b
2

Location of
socket connectors

4 M W
b
2

d
b

4
1 6
3

2 0
2 2
2 4

2 6
2 8
1

3 2

6
V I

REG - D Operating Manual

3 0
3 2

3 2

V5

I 4V

I 3I I

3 2

3 2

I 2I

1
I

13

REG - D
3.2

Connection diagram

REG-D

Please observe the contact load at R1 and


R2 (see below)!

**

The connections for I and U can be freely


assigned via the menu.

110 V DC

230 V AC

20 A Switch on

5 A @ cos = 1

5 A Hold

3 A @ cos = 0.4

0.4 A Switch off

Contact load R1, R2:

14

AC 250 V, 5 A, cos = 1,
DC 250 V, 150 W
REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3.3

Overview of features

REG-D is a highly variable product.


The operating manual must take this factor into account and
provide different descriptions for the for the various
specifications.
Because the features ... M2, S1... D2 ... are noted on the name
plate of the device, but the relation to the function which it
stands for is not always given, the complete structure of the
device's features is listed here.

Feature

Code

REG-D
REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring, 28TE, 3HE plug-in module
Standard version, with double E-LAN interface, COM
1, COM 2,
16 binary inputs, 10 relay outputs plus status relays
and
WinREG parameterisation and programming software incl. connection cable
Design
19 plug-in module
Wall-mounting housing (30TE) - without wiring
Wall-mounting housing (30TE) - with wiring
(Terminals compatible with REG 5A)
Panel-mounting housing (30TE) with wiring
Panel-mounting housing (49TE) with wiring
Wall-mounting housing (49TE) with wiring
Wall-mounting or panel-mounting housing (30/49TE)
on request
19 mounting rack according on request

B01
B02
B03
B05
B06
B07
B91
B92

Power supply
From monitoring network AC 80V ... 110V ... 185V H0
AC 85V ... 110V ... 264V / DC 88V ... 220V ... 280V H1
H2
DC 18V ... 60V ... 72V
Input current
IEN 1A
IEN 5A

REG - D Operating Manual

F1
F2

15

REG - D
Feature

Code

Measurement transducer display functions for network quantities


Three-phase current with equal load
Three-phase current with unequal load
U measurement for overvoltage, U and I measurements for undervoltage
Other uses of the transformer ( 2 x I, 2 x U, e.g. triplewound transformer)

16

M1
M2
M3
M9

Recorder functions for network quantities


Incl. evaluation software
Without
With

S0
S1

Parallel operation
without firmware for parallel operation
with firmware for parallel operation

K0
K1

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Feature
Analogue inputs and outputs
without
with 2 inputs
with 4 inputs
with 6 inputs
with 2 outputs
with 4 outputs
with 6 outputs
with 2 inputs and 2 outputs
with 2 inputs and 4 outputs
with 4 inputs and 2 outputs
Any combination on request
each with 2 analogue inputs and outputs
PT 100 direct input
Tap-change potentiometer input

Code
E00
E91
E92
E93
E94
E95
E96
E97
E98
E99
E900

Note:
Please specify the scale if known!:
Example:
Channel 1: -100 ... 0 ... +100 MW
-20 ... 0 ... +20 mA
Channel 2: 0 ... 80 ... 100 V
4 ... 16 ... 20 mA
Channel 3: 1 ... 19 Stufen
0 ... 20 mA
Note:
A total of 3 modules may be used. Pay attention
to the TMM particularly with use of the
transformer monitoring module!
Binary inputs (freely programmable)
E1...E8: AC/DC48..250V, E9...E16: AC/DC 10 ...
50V (can also be used as a BCD input)
E1...E16: AC/DC 48 ...250V (can also be used as a
BCD input)
E1...E16: AC/DC 10 ...50V (can also be used as a
BCD input)
RS485 interface (COM 3)
without
with
Note:
COM 3 is only required for ANA-D and BIN-D!
REG - D Operating Manual

D1
D2
D3

R0
R1

17

REG - D
Feature

Code

Control system connection: Internal or external:


XW0
without (more in Feature Group Y))
with integrated connection (more in Feature Group XW1
XL)
with ext. connection (REG-P/PE/PM) more in Feature XW9
Group Y)
Integrated protocol interface card
for control connection of REG-D system
for control connection of multiple systems
Note: XL9 can only be combined with XZ15..XZ19
and XZ91
Type of connection:
Copper RS 232
RS 485 only for 2-wire operation

XL1
XL9

XV10
XV11

Note:
XV13 .. XV 19 can only be selected in combination
with B02B92.
In all other case, select the appropriate fibre optic
cable module!
Fibre optic cable with FSMA connection
Glass fibre
(wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)
Plastic
(wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)
Fibre optic cable with ST connection
Glass fibre
(wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)
Plastic
(wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)

18

XV13
XV15

XV17
XV19

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Feature

Code

Log
IEC60870-5-103 for ABB
IEC60870-5-103 for Areva
IEC60870-5-103 for SAT
IEC60870-5-103 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)
IEC60870-5-103 for Sprecher Automation
IEC60870-5-103 for andere

XZ10
XZ11
XZ12
XZ13
XZ14
XZ90

IEC60870-5-101 for ABB


IEC60870-5-101 for IDS
IEC60870-5-101 for SAT
IEC60870-5-101 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)
IEC60870-5-101 for others

XZ15
XZ17
XZ18
XZ19
XZ91

DNP 3.00

XZ20

LONMark

XZ21

SPABUS
MODBUS RTU

XZ22
XZ23

Local/remote switching using the keyboard


without
with

Y0
Y1

Status output
closes during fault
opens during fault

U0
U1

Operating manual
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Russian

G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G8

Display text
Same as operating manual
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Dutch
Czech
Russian

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

REG - D Operating Manual

19

REG - D

3
4

IE
2

O p tio n
M 2

Block diagram
3.4.1

Block diagram of socket connectors

A s s ig n m e n t

2 6

1 6

2 6

b
2

2 8

E 1

b
6

E 3

b
8

E 4

3 0

3 2

3 0

3 2

2 0

2 2

2 4

2 0

2 2

2 4

6
1 2

1 0

E 5

E 6

C O M 3
R S 4 8 5
( O p tio n R 1 )

1 2

1 4

1 2

E 7

1 6

1 4

E 8
-

1 6

2 4

2 6

C O M

R S 2 3 2
( O p tio n P 1 )

2 8

3 0

L E D

o n th e fro n t p a n e l

D - S u b p lu g c o n n e c to r

D is p la y

3 2

2 4

C O M

R S 2 3 2

2 6

2 8

3 0

O p tio n D 1
B in a r y in p u t 1 0 ... 4 8 V A C /D C
E 9 E 1 0 E 1 1 E 1 2 G N D E 1 3 E 1 4 E 1 5 E 1 6 G N D

R A M /R O M

K e y b o a rd

T im e r

1 0

R T S

1 0

z
b

4 8 ... 2 3 0 V A C /D C

R x D

R x -

1 2

E 2

T x -

E -

1 0

B in a r y in p u t

E -L A N

E A -

R o w

L C D

E -L A N

E +

1 2 8 x 1 2 8 D O T S

P in N o .

M o d u le 3

2 8

E A +

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

1 4

B in a r y o u tp u t
4 8 - 2 5 0 V

2 6

2 4

B A 4

B A 3

B A 2

B A 1

G N D

M a n ./A u to

F re e

F re e

R a is e

L o w e r

F re e

R 2

R 4

R 1

R 3

R 5

R 6

( O p tio n N 2 )

S ta tu s

3 2

E 1 3 ... E 1 6 G N D

In p u t o r O u tp u t
M o d u le 2

1 6

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

b
1 4

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

IE

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

3 0

3 2

2 2

2 8

3 0

3 2

2 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

2 0

2 0

2 2

1 4

1 0

1 0

R o w

P in N o .

A s s ig n m e n t

D C D
D S R
R X D
R T S
T X D
C T S
D T R
R I
G N D

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

L 1

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

d o n 't u s e
E 9 ... E 1 2 G N D

2 5 0 V

P o le

C T S
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

B in a r y o u tp u t

c o n ta c t

N C c o n ta c t/N O

G N D
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

T x +
M a n u a l (M )

T x D

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

R x +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

2 0

A u to m a tic ( A /M )

M o d u le 1

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

A n a lo g u e c h a n n e ls ( O p tio n E 9 x )
+

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

E A +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E A F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

O p tio n
M 2

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

L 2

3 0

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

2 2

3 2

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

P o w e r s u p p ly
A C o r D C

2 8

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

REG - D Operating Manual

20

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

3
L 3

R o w
P in N o .

L (-)

2 4

A s s ig n m e n t

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

L (+ )

P in N o .
A s s ig n m e n t

3.4

Feature ... D1 ...

2 4

2 2

2 0

P in N o .

L 3

L 2

L 1

IE

R o w

3 0

3 2

2 8

In p u t o r O u tp u t
M o d u le 2

M o d u le 1

1 4

1 4

1 6

z
1 6

b
2 6

b
2 8

z
2 6

M o d u le 3
-

L C D

E -L A N
L

z
2 8

E 1

b
4

E 2

b
6

E 3

b
8

B in a r y in p u t
E 4

T im e r

b
1 0

E 5
-

z
1 0

b
1 2

E 6
-

z
1 2

b
1 4

E 7

z
1 4

b
1 6

E 8

z
1 6

b
1 8

E 9

z
1 8

z
2 0

2 0

E 1 0

b
2 2

E 1 1

R S 2 3 2
( O p tio n P 1 )

C O M

z
2 2

b
2 4

z
2 4

b
2 6

E 1 3

z
2 6

O p tio n D 2

D is p la y

E 1 2

1
6

2
7

3
8

4
9

o n th e fro n t p a n e l

D - S u b p lu g c o n n e c to r

L E D

2 4

z
2 2

z
2 0

b
2 4

b
2 2

b
2 0

R A M /R O M

K e y b o a rd

R S 4 8 5
( O p tio n R 1 )

C O M 3

3 2

3 0

3 2

3 0

4 8 ... 2 3 0 V A C /D C

E -L A N
R

1 2

1 0

1 0

T x +

T x -

T x D

R x D

G N D

1 2

1 2 8 x 1 2 8 D O T S

A n a lo g u e c h a n n e ls ( O p tio n E 9 x )

O p tio n
M 2

P o w e r s u p p ly
A C o r D C

P in N o .

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

A s s ig n m e n t

A s s ig n m e n t

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

IE

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

L (-)

L (+ )

P in N o .

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

E +

E A -

E A +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

O p tio n
M 2

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

E F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

E +

E A -

E A +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

A s s ig n m e n t

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

E -

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

R x +
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

D
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

A u to m a tic ( A /M )

R T S

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

D
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

R x -

M a n u a l (M )

C T S

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

D
b
2 8

E 1 4

z
2 8

R S 2 3 2

C O M

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 1 5

3 0

3 0

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

d o n 't u s e

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

R
b
3 2

E 1 6

D C
D S
R X
R T
T X
C T
D T
R I
G N
-

3 2

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

B in a r y o u tp u t
5 0 V
S ta tu s

b
2 6

z
2 4

R 1

F re e

L o w e r

R 3

R 2

R a is e

F re e

R 4

F re e

R 5

H
M a n ./A u to

G N D

B A 1

B A 2

B A 3

B A 4

R 6

( O p tio n N 1 )

2 5 0 V
P o le

R o w

1 0

1 0

1 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

2 0

2 0

2 2

2 4

2 2

2 8

3 0

3 2

3 0

3 2

R o w

B in a r y o u tp u t
c o n ta c t
N C c o n ta c t/N O

P in N o .
A s s ig n m e n t

REG - D Operating Manual


1

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

REG - D
Feature ... D2 ...

21

REG - D
3.4.2

3.4.2.1 Socket connector 1; (binary outputs BO


Note

)Option N2 is connected to the local-remote switch via


the keypad (feature Y1) by default.
Function

Des

Assignment

Pin Assignment Pin

Raise (2 contact pairs)


1 NC contact and
1 NO contact
Lower (2 contact
pairs)
1 NC contact and
1 NO contact
Freely programmable
Freely programmable
Freely programmable
Manual/Automatic
(switch)
Status
Freely programmable
Binary outputs (BO)
4 relays

R1

Pole
Pole

b2 NC contact z2
b4 NO contact z4

R2

Pole
Pole

b8 NC contact z8
b10 NO contact z10

R3
R4
R5
R6

Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
NC contact
Status Pole
BA1 Poles
BA1...4
...
BA4 NC contact
BA1
NC contact
BA2

b14
b16
b20
b22
b24
b26
z28

NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact

b30 NC contact z30


BA3
b32 NC contact z32
BA4

S ta tu s

b
z
R o w
A s s i g n m e n t P i n N 2 o6 . 2 4


b
4

R1 ... R6, BA1 ... BA4:


Load:

z
4

b
1 0

z
8

1 0

1 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

2 0

2 0

B A 4

B A 1

B A 3

( O p tio n N 2 )

R 6

F re e

R 5

F re e

R 4

F re e

L o w e r

z
2

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

R 3

M a n ./A u to

R 2

R a is e

N C c o n ta c t/
N O c o n ta c t

P o le

R 1

B in a r y o u tp u t
4 8 - 2 3 0 V

2 3 0 V

B in a r y o u tp u t

z14
z16
z20
z22

NO contact z24

B A 2

Socket connector 1,
(Binary outputs BO
R1 ... R6
BA1 ... BA4)

Socket connector 1

2 2

2 4

2 2

2 8

3 0

3 2

3 0

3 2

potential free relay contacts


250 V AC, 5 A, cos = 1,
250 V DC, 150 W

Note

The Status binary output can be used as either an NC


contact or an NO contact through the appropriate
configuration of a wire jumper. The location of the wire
jumper is shown in the diagram on page 23.

22

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Location of the wire jumper on terminal block 1
REG-REL

NO contact (NO) function

NC contact (NC) function

Caution!

Only use one function at a time!


Either NC contact or NO contact
To interlock a control command, the relays R1 and R2 may be
switched as follows:

R1

R2
Raise

REG - D Operating Manual

Lower

23

REG - D
3.4.3
Socket connector 2
(binary inputs
E1 ... E16

Socket connector 2

3.4.3.1 Socket connector 2; (binary inputs, feature D1)


Function

Des Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

Freely configurable
(raise)

E1

b2

z2

Freely configurable
(lower)

E2

b4

z4

Freely configurable
(Inhibit Low)

E3

b6

z6

Freely configurable
(high-speed
switching)

E4

b8

z8

Manual / Automatic
(M/A)

E5

b10 -

z10

Manual (M)

E6

b12 -

z12

Freely configurable

E7

b14 -

z14

Freely configurable

E8

b16 -

z16

Freely configurable
(BCD1)

E9

b24 -

b32

Freely configurable
(BCD2)

E 10 +

b26 -

b32

Freely configurable
(BCD4)

E 11 +

b28 -

b32

Freely configurable
(BCD8)

E 12 +

b30 -

b32

Freely configurable
(BCD10)

E 13 +

z24 -

z32

Freely configurable
(BCD20)

E 14 +

z26 -

z32

Freely configurable

E 15 +

z28 -

z32

Negative sign for


BCD-Code

E 16 +

z30 -

z32

Note

E9 ... E16 are always factory-paramaterised as a BCD


input, when not working with feature T1. If, however, it
will be used with feature T1, the BCD-input can be
achieved by using terminal block 5 (or socket connector
5).

24

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

z
2

z
b
4
4

z
b
6
6

z
b
8
8

z
b

z
b

z
b

1 0

1 0

1 2

1 2

1 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

E 1 3 ... E 1 6 G N D

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 8

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 9 ... E 1 2 G N D

E 7
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 6
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 5
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 4
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 3
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

b
2

M a n u a l (M )

E 2
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 1
+

O p tio n D 1
B in a r y in p u t 1 0 ... 4 8 V A C /D C
E 9 E 1 0 E 1 1 E 1 2 G N D E 1 3 E 1 4 E 1 5 E 1 6 G N D

4 8 ... 2 3 0 V A C /D C

A u to m a tic ( A /M )

B in a r y in p u t

b
b

b
b

2 4

2 6

2 8

3 0

3 2

2 4

2 6

2 8

3 0

3 2

Note

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


can be influenced by external signals via inputs E1 ...
E16.
Only inputs 5 and 6 are permanently assigned. All other
inputs are freely configurable The factory settings are
shown in brackets (refer to table on page 24)!

REG - D Operating Manual

25

REG - D
Socket connector 2
(binary inputs
E1 ... E16

3.4.3.2 Socket connector 2; (binary inputs, feature D2)


Function

Des Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

Freely configurable
(Raise)

E1

b2 -

z2

Freely configurable
(Lower)

E2

b4 -

z4

Freely configurable
(Inhibit Low)

E3

b6 -

z6

Freely configurable
E4
(high-speed switching)

b8 -

z8

Manual/Automatic
(M/A)

E5

b10 -

z10

Manual (M)

E6

b12 -

z12

Freely configurable

E7

b14 -

z14

Freely configurable

E8

b16 -

z16

Freely configurable
(BCD1)

E9 +

b18 -

z18

Freely configurable
(BCD2)

E 10 +

b20 -

z20

Freely configurable
(BCD4)

E 11 +

b22 -

z22

Freely configurable
(BCD8)

E 12 +

b24 -

z24

Freely configurable
(BCD10)

E 13 +

b26 -

z26

Freely configurable
(BCD20)

E 14 +

b28 -

z28

Freely configurable

E 15 +

b30 -

z30

Negative sign for


BCD-Code

E 16 +

b32 -

z32

Note

E9 ... E16 are always factory-paramaterised as BCD


inputs, when not working with feature T1. However, if
feature T1 is used, the BCD-input can be configured by
using terminal block 5 (or socket connector 5).

26

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

b
z
2
2

z
b
4
4

z
b
6
6

z
b
8
8

E 1 3
+

E 1 4
+

E 1 5
+

E 1 6
+

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 1 2

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 1 1

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 1 0

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 9

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 8

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 7

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 6

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 5

M a n u a l (M )

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

O p tio n D 2

4 8 ... 2 3 0 V A C /D C
E 4
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 3
F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

F r e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le

E 2

A u to m a tic ( A /M )

B in a r y in p u t
E 1

z
b

z
b

z
b

b
z

z
b

z
b

1 0

1 0

1 2

1 2

1 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

1 8

1 8

2 0

2 0

2 2

2 2

2 4

2 4

2 6

2 6

2 8

2 8

3 0

3 0

3 2

3 2

Note

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


can be influenced by external signals via inputs E1 ...
E16.
Only inputs 5 and 6 are permanently assigned. All other
inputs are freely configurable. The factory settings are
shown in brackets (refer to table on page 26)!

REG - D Operating Manual

27

REG - D
Socket connector 3
(measuring voltage
U E,
auxiliary voltage UH)

3.4.4

Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary


voltage)

Function

Assignment

Pin

Measuring voltage UE

L1

20

L2

22

L3

24

Auxiliary voltage (AC/DC) UH) L (+)

28

N (-)

30

Earth

32

O p tio n M 2

P o w e r s u p p ly
A C o r D C

U 2
L (-)

L 3

L 2

L 1

L (+ )

U 1

R o w
A s s ig n m e n t P in N o .
S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

2 0

2 2
!

2 4

2 8

3 2

3 0

Note

In the standard version, the Relay for Voltage Control &


Transformer Monitoring is supplied with only one
voltage transformer (U1). A second voltage transformer
(U2) can optionally be supplied that can operate either
together with U1 in a V-circuit or when electronically
isolated from U1. If operating only with U1, the
measuring voltage (command variable) must always be
connected to pins 20 and 22.
The two voltage transformers U1 and U2 can also be
used to regulate the triple-wound transformers.
However, in all cases additional consultation is
necessary.

28

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Command variable
(voltage)

L1

L2

L3

Pin connection

L1 L2

20

22

L2 L3

20

22

L1 L2

22

20

3.4.5

Socket connector 4; (measuring current input)

Function

Assignment Pin

Measuring current (AC) IE1

Measuring current (AC) IE2

Socket connector 4
(input for
measuring current IE)

Note

Current IE2 is only used for special applications and


measurements in three-phase current networks (Aron
circuit) loaded according to the requirements of the user
(feature M2).

REG - D Operating Manual

29

REG - D
Socket connector 5
(tap-changer)
BCD signal display

30

3.4.6

Socket connector 5; (tap changing via feature T1)

for control voltages USt = AC/DC 48 V ... 250 V

Input

Function

Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

E17

1 (BCD)

b2

z2

E18

2 (BCD)

b4

z4

E19

4 (BCD)

b6

z6

E20

8 (BCD)

b8

z8

E21

10 (BCD)

b10 -

z10

E22

20 (BCD)

b12 -

z12

E23

Freely
programmable

b14 -

z14

E24

Positive or
negative sign of
the display:
Minus

b16 -

z16

E25

Freely
programmable

b24 -

b32

E26

Freely
programmable

b26 -

b32

E27

Freely
programmable

b28 -

b32

E28

Freely
programmable

b30 -

b32

E29

Freely
programmable

z24 -

z32

E30

Freely
programmable

z26 -

z32

E31

Freely
programmable

z28 -

z32

E32

Freely
programmable

z30 -

z32

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .
R o w
b

A s s ig n m e n t P in N o .

6
U

R o w
A s s ig n m e n t P in N o .

1 0

1 0

1 2

1 2

1 4

1 4

1 6

1 6

: 4 8 V ... 2 3 0 V
E

2 4

3 2

2 6

3 2

2 8

3 2

3 0

3 2

2 4

3 2

2 6

3 2

2 8

3 2

3 0

3 2

U
+
1

B C D

+
2

+
4

: 1 0 V ... 5 0 V
-

+
8

1 0

T a p -c h a n g e r P o s itio n

4 8 ... 2 3 0 V o r 1 0 ... 5 0 V

2 0

V Z +

V Z -

( O p tio n T 1 )

Note

For parameterisation at a later date or for alterations,


ensure that inputs b24 ... z32 (48 V ... 230 V) are
designated as
E17 ... E24 and inputs b2 ... z16 (10 V ... 48 V) as
E25 ... E32. If feature T1 is included in the scope of
delivery, the inputs are normally prepared for switching
with BCD signals (refer to tables).
The inputs can be used for a variety of other functions
using setup 5 of the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring.

If the BCD signal is only in the range 10 V ... 48 V, inputs E25 ...
E30 must also be configured as BCD inputs using setup 5 or
WinREG.
e.g.:

E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30

BCD1
BCD2
BCD4
BCD8
BCD10
BCD20

REG - D Operating Manual

31

REG - D
Socket connector 5
(tap-changer)
BCD signal display

Socket connector 5
(tap-changer)
BCD signal display

32

BCD coding

BCD input signal

Relay display

20 10

10

11

12

13

14

20

21

21

For control voltages USt = AC/DC 10 V ... 48 V

Input

BCD

Pin

Input

BCD

Pin

E25

b24

E29

10

z24

E26

b26

E30

20

z26

E27

b28

E31

Vz+

z28

E28

b30

E32

Vz -

z30

GND 1 ... 8

b32

GND 10 ... VZ - z32

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3.4.7

Socket connector 6; (analogue inputs / outputs;


interfaces)

Function

Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

Analogue modules 1.1


and 1.2

1.1 +

b2

1.2 +

z2

1.1 -

b4

1.2 -

z4

E-LAN

left EA +

b6

right EA +

z6

left EA -

b8

right EA -

z8

left E +

b10 right E +

z10

left E -

b12 right E -

z12

Analogue modules 2.1


and 2.2

2.1 +

b14 2.2 +

z14

2.1 -

b16 2.2 -

z16

COM 2

TxD

b20 RTS

z20

RxD

b22 CTS

z22

GND

b24 dont use

z24

Analogue modules 3.1


and 3.2

3.1 +

b26 3.2 +

z26

3.1 -

b28 3.2 -

z28

COM 3

Tx +

b30 Rx +

z30

Tx -

b32 Rx -

z32

( O p tio n l R 1 )
R S 4 8 5

1 2

1 0

3 2

3 0
b

E A -

E -

3 0

E +

3 2

E A +

2 0

E -

R x -

R x +

2 2

E +

T x D

2 4

E A -

R x D

2 0

1 0

T x -

R T S

G N D

2 2

1 2

T x +

C T S

2 4

A s s ig n m e n t P in N o .
R o w

E -L A N
L

E -L A N
R

C O M 3
2

+ 1 2 V

C O M

E A +

( O p tio n P 1 )
R S 2 3 2

Socket connector 6
(Analogue inputs AI...
and/or
analogue outputs
AO ... .
Programmable
assignment,
interfaces)

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

A n a lo g u e c h a n n e ls ( O p tio n E 9 x )

z
b

b
2

4
2

z
4

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A
R o w
A s s ig n m e n t P in N o .

In p u t o r o u tp u t
m o d u le 2
m o d u le 3
+
- +
- +
- +
-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

m o d u le 1
- +
+

b
b

z
z

b
b

z
z

1 4

1 6

1 4

1 6

2 6

2 8

2 6

2 8

S o c k e t c o n n e c to r N o .

REG - D Operating Manual

33

REG - D
Note

The analogue inputs and outputs can be adjusted to the


appropriate measuring tasks via SETUP 6, F1, F5 on the
keypad, or far more elegantly by using WinREG.
In principle, all the analogue measurement quantities (U,
I, P, Q, S, ...) that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can measure can be output as
mA values. This means the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can be used as a cost-effective
transducer without requiring additional space.
In some cases an adjustment using additional
background programs may be required. In this case we
recommend contacting our headquarters.
Quasi-analogue signals, e.g. tap-changing, can also be
output as analogue values if required.
To upgrade the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring at a later point, the input and output modules
must be connected to the REG-CPU terminal block with
two channels each (see Updating Analogue Inputs,
Outputs, Tap-Change Potentiometer Input on page
215).

34

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3.4.8

Interface COM 1

Interface COM 1

Function

Pin

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

Signal-Ground

DSR

RTS

CTS

RI

D - S u b p lu g c o n n e c to r
o n th e fro n t p a n e l
1

3
7

D C D
D S R
R X D
R T S
T X D
C T S
D T R
R I
G N D

C O M

R S 2 3 2

REG - D Operating Manual

35

REG - D
3.5

Installation in the mounting rack

3.5.1

19 mounting rack, feature B92

5 7 .2
1 3 2 .5
(3 T E )

7 .2

The diagrams show the main components of a REGSys


regulation system in a 19 mounting rack.
The number and location of the individual connection blocks
depends on the respective system version.
The specified dimensions must never be exceeded. Each
mounting rack is prepared for connecting up to 2 LWL
connections (FSMA or ST), that will be mounted if ordered.

1 0 .3

8 4 x 5 ,0 8 = 4 2 6 .7 2

2 5 5 .5

2 7 7

2 7 9 .5

4 6 5
4 8 2 .6

Caution!

The mounting rack must be earthed!


Earth it using an earthing clamp (green/yellow) and/or an
earth strap.
The mounting rack has 84 sections and therefore 84 n place
numbers. A specific place number is the reference point for the
installation of the guide and the connection element on the rear
side of the mounting rack.
Place numbers

36

Socket connector

Screws

n+4

n+8

n+11 n+16 n+25

Guide

n+26

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3.6

Wall-mounted housing

3.6.1

Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B02


- D
A :R E G -D

1 2 :3 4 :0 0

R e g le r -M o d u s

M A N U E L L

Is tw e rt
z u l. R e g e la b w .

1 . S o llw e r t

1 0 0 .0 %
1 0 0 .0 V
1 0 1 .0 V
2 .0 %

S tu fe n s te llu n g

1 2

F 1
F 2
F 3

1 3 8

R E G

F 4

+ 1 0 %

2 2 4

-1 0 %

F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

A U T O

E S C

C O M 1

M E N U

2 8 0

2 1 4

3.6.2

Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B03


- D
A :R E G -D

1 2 :3 4 :0 0

R e g le r -M o d u s

M A N U E L L

Is tw e rt
z u l. R e g e la b w .

1 0 0 .0 %
1 0 0 .0 V
1 0 1 .0 V
2 .0 %

S tu fe n s te llu n g

1 . S o llw e r t

1 2

F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4

+ 1 0 %

2 2 4

-1 0 %

1 3 8

R E G

F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

R E L 1

R E L 2

h h e r
2 7

2 8

3 0

R E L 3

tie fe r

2 9

3 1

U H ilfs s p g .
L +
L -

3 2

3 4

3 5

B A 1

3 6

U M e s p g .
L 2
L 3

M E N U

R E L 1 /R

fre i

3 3

L 1

E S C

3 7

R E L 2 /R

R E L 3 /R

3 9

4 1

B A 2

3 8

4 0

B A 3

4 2

S ta tu s
1 A /5 A

A U T O

C O M 1

1 0

2 8 0

2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 0 4 1 4 2

1 0

2 1 4

REG - D Operating Manual

37

REG - D
3.6.3

Control panel mounting enclosure, type 30 MW,


feature B05
2 8 7

5 2
R E G

- D
A :R E G -D

1 2 :3 4 :0 0

R e g le r -M o d u s

M A N U E L L

Is tw e rt
z u l. R e g e la b w .

1 . S o llw e r t

1 0 0 .0 %
1 0 0 .0 V
1 0 1 .0 V
2 .0 %

S tu fe n s te llu n g

1 2

F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4

-1 0 %

+ 1 0 %
0

F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

A U T O

E S C

C O M 1

M E N U

1 9 2

11

111

A C /D C
H

4
U
5

2 7

4 3

tie fe r

2 8

4 4

B C D

1 3

2 9

4 5

B C D

3 0

4 6

1 5

S tills e tz u n g
S c h n e lls c h a ltu n g
A u to
(A /H )

3 1

4 7

B C D

1 0

1 6

H a n d

3 2

4 8

B C D

2 0

1 7
E

1 4 4

3 6

2 1
E 1

3 7

2 2

l
S ta tu s

1 0

3 8

2 3

E A +

2 4

E A -

2 5

E +

2 6

N O
S ta tu s
N C

3.6.4

3 5

(-)

2 0

1 A /5 A
k

E -

3 9
4 0

B C D

B C D

4 9

3 4

p ro g r.

1 9

7
8

3 3

p ro g r.

1 8

Terminal designation I ... IV

h h e r

1 2

E -L A N (L )

1 4

18

E 1 ...E 1 2

1 1

1
2

5 0

V Z

5 1

p ro g r.

(-)

5 2
5 3

p ro g r.

5 4
5 5

p ro g r.

5 6

4 1

5 7

4 2

5 8

H a n d /A u to
H
A

Control panel mounting enclosure, type 49 MW,


feature B06
5 2
R E G

- D

a . e b e r le

A :R E G -D

1 2 :3 4 :0 0

R e g le r -M o d u s

M A N U E L L

Is tw e rt
z u l. R e g e la b w .

1 0 0 .0 %
1 0 0 .0 V
1 0 1 .0 V
2 .0 %

S tu fe n s te llu n g

1 . S o llw e r t

1 2

g m b h

a . e b e r le

2 8 7

g m b h

F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4

-1 0 %

+ 1 0 %
0

F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

A U T O

E S C

C O M 1

M E N U

2 8 8

11

111
1 1

U
2

A C /D C
H

4
U
5

2 7

4 3

tie fe r

2 8

4 4

B C D

S tills e tz u n g
S c h n e lls c h a ltu n g
A u to
(A /H )

2 9

4 5

B C D

3 0

4 6

B C D

1 5

3 1

4 7

B C D

1 0

1 6

H a n d

3 2

4 8

B C D

2 0

1 7

p ro g r.

3 3

4 9

1 9

1 4 4

2 0

1 A /5 A
k

I
l

9
S ta tu s
N O
S ta tu s
N C

E 1

18

h h e r

1 3

1 8

1 0

E 1 ...E 1 2

1 2
1 4

p ro g r.

3 4
3 5

(-)

3 6

2 1

3 7

2 2

3 8

2 3

E A +

2 4

E A -

2 5

E +

2 6

E -

(L )

E -L A N

3 9
4 0

B C D

5 0
p ro g r.

p ro g r.

p ro g r.

V Z

5 1

Terminal designation I ... IV

(-)

5 2
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6

4 1

5 7

4 2

5 8

H a n d /A u to
H
A

Note

The enclosure can accommodate further REGSys


components (REG-P, BIN-D, etc.)

38

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3.6.5

Wall-mounted housing, type 49 MW, feature B07


- D

a . e b e r le

A :R E G -D

1 2 :3 4 :0 0

R e g le r -M o d u s

M A N U E L L

1 . S o llw e r t

1 0 0 .0 %
1 0 0 .0 V
1 0 1 .0 V
2 .0 %

Is tw e rt
z u l. R e g e la b w .
S tu fe n s te llu n g

a . e b e r le

g m b h

g m b h

F 1
F 2
F 3

1 3 8

R E G

1 2
F 4

-1 0 %

+ 1 0 %

B E 2

B E 3

B E 4

B E 5

B E 6

B E 7

B E 8

5 0

5 1

5 2

1 6

E 7

E 8

1 7

1 8

1 9

2 0

5 4

5 5

2 1

2 2

2 3

5 3

E -

4 9

E 6

E A -

4 8

1 5

E A +

4 7
E 5

1 4

fre i

4 6
E 4

1 3

4 5
E 3

1 2

4 4
E 2

1 1

E +

E -L A N

4 3
E 1

G N D

R E L 4 /R

4 2

1 0

5 6

5 7

5 8

R E L 5

R E L 6

R E L 4
fre i

B A 3

B E 1

4 1

4 0

S ta tu s

R E L 3 /R

3 9

B A 2

3 8

H a n d /A u to

R E L 2 /R

B A 4

3 7

B A 1

3 6

3 5

3 4

U M e s p g .
L 2
L 3

R E L 1 /R

fre i

3 3

L 1

3 2

3 1

tie fe r

3 0

R E L 3

tie fe r

2 9

h h e r

fre i

2 8

U H ilfs s p g .
L +
L -

1 A /5 A

2 7

fre i

R E L 2

h h e r

C O M 1

M E N U

S tills e tz u n g
S c h n e lls c h a ltg .
A u to m .
(A /H )
H a n d

R E L 1

E S C

2 2 4

F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

A U T O

2 4

2 5

2 6

2 8 0

111
1

2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 0 4 1 4 2

18

1 0

11

4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 5 0 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8

1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6

3 1 0

Note

The housing can accommodate further REGSys


components (REG-P, BIN-D, etc.).
The housing feature B07 will then, however, become
feature B91.

REG - D Operating Manual

39

REG - D
3.7

Pin assignment for types B05, B06 and B07

(Standard assignment, if no other agreements have been


reached!)
No.

Screw connector terminal I

1 Auxiliary voltage
2 Auxiliary voltage

UH AC/DC

3
4 Input voltage
UE

5 Input voltage
6
7k
Current input
8I
9
Status
10

open during fault


closed during fault

Screw connector terminal II

No.
11 Input 1

Raise

12 Input 2

Lower

13 Input 3

Inhibit low

14 Input 4

High-speed switching

15 Input 5

AUTO (M/A)

16 Input 6

MANUAL

17 Input 7

Freely programmable

18 Input 8

Freely programmable

19 Ground for input terminals 11 ... 18


20
21
22
23 EA+
24 EA E-LAN (L)
25 E+
26 E-

40

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
No.
27
28
29

Raise

Screw connector terminal III

30
31
32
33

Lower

34
35
36

Freely programmable

37
38

Freely programmable

39
40

Freely programmable

41
42

REG - D Operating Manual

41

REG - D

Screw connector terminal IV

No.
43

BCD 1

44

BCD 2

45

BCD 4

46

BCD 8

47

BCD 10

48

BCD 20

Input tap-changer
50 ... 230 V AC/DC

49
50

VZ

51

(-)

52
53
54
55
56

42

57

MANUAL

58

AUTO

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
4

Operation

4.1

The front panel operator interface of the


REG-D
R E G
Label
Information:
With an appropriate
tool, the inserted
label can be removed
for labelling.

Local
Remote

- D
LEDs
LCD display

Status
5
6
7
1
2
3
4

A U T O

F 1
F 2
F 3

Function keys

F 4
F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

Abort
Menu
COM 1 interface

Arrow keys

Return

Automatic operation
Manual (M)

The MPK operation level (people-process-communication;


German: Mensch-Proze-Kommunikation) of the REG-D Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is implemented as
a membrane keypad with integrated light-emitting diodes
(LEDs).

REG - D Operating Manual

43

REG - D
4.1.1

Display elements

LCD display regulator mode


Address at bus (station identification)

Relay name

Time

Identification line
Status line
ACTUAL VALUE in
capital letters = measurement
simulation is running

Setpoint value
in %

ACTUAL VALUE in
small letters = measurement
simulation off

Setpoint value
in V/kV
Actual value
in V/kV
Regulative deviation

Progress bar (when active)

when the regulative deviation is lower than the permissible regulative deviation.
when the regulative deviation is higher than the permissible regulative deviation.

Backwards high-speed switching is indicated by <--<

LCD Display Recorder Mode


Address at bus (station identification)

Relay name

Time

Identification line
Back
Forward

Present voltage

Menu recorder
Feedrate
speed

Present feedrate speed


(14s / scale section)
Present voltage

Stretch scale
Tap-change

Date

Time

Set permissible
regulative deviation

Present voltage

44

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
LEDs
Status

green

>U

Voltage limit U exceeded

red

<U

Voltage limit U not reached

red

>I

Current limit I exceeded

red

All LEDs (excluding status LED) are freely programmable. The


LEDs 5 ... 7 are assigned the functions >U, <U and >I as
standard.

4.1.2

Function keys

Function keys (F1 ... F5)


Choose the various display modes and parameterise the REGD Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.
AUTOMATIC operation mode
Automatic regulation with specified parameters

F1

AUTO

MANUAL operation mode


Parameterise the REG-D and manually control the transformer.
Note

Changes to the parameters are only accepted when in


MANUAL OPERATION MODE
.
Local / Remote
Switch between local and remote.
Use the local/remote key to change between local and remote
modes. The selected condition is indicated by an LED (red =
local, green = remote).

lo c a l
re m o te

Local function
Switching between MANUAL / AUTOMATIC modes and
between raise / lower control modes is only possible via the
keypad
(

).

Remote function
Switching between MANUAL / AUTOMATIC modes and
between raise / lower control commands is only possible via the
binary inputs or via COM1/2.
The local / remote function is possible from Firmware version
1.97.
REG - D Operating Manual

45

REG - D
ESC

ESC (Abort)
Return back to the display mode from the SETUP menus.
Note

Changes to parameters only become effective after


confirming with RETURN
.
Measurement value simulation
Raise or lower the simulated measurement value with the arrow
keys during the internal measuring value simulation (see page
143).
Note

The measured values are supplied by the Relay for


Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. It is not
necessary to supply the measured values from an
external source.
Controlling the tap-changer
The raise
(higher voltage) and lower
(reduce
voltage) arrow keys are used to control the tap-changer, i.e. to
make changes to the transformer mounting ratio (see page
146).
Note

The arrow keys are only active when the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is in
MANUAL OPERATION MODE
.
MENU

MENU
Switch between the various display modes and the SETUP
menus of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring.
Note

Changes to the parameters are only accepted when in


MANUAL OPERATION MODE
.
Return
Confirm/accept an altered parameter from the SETUP menu
items (see page 102).

46

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
4.1.3

Plug connection

COM1 serial interface


For connecting the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring to external devices.

4.2

COM1

Operating principle

The operation of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &


Transformer Monitoring is completely menu-guided and is
principally the same for each menu item in the SETUP menu.
The following operating principles apply for setting or changing
the regulation parameters:

MANUAL OPERATION MODE


changes the operation mode to manual operation

MENU

MENU

Access list of operating modes

MENU

MENU

selects the menu item SETUP

MENU

can be used to scroll through the pages of the


SETUP menu selection until the required parameter
appears on the display.
MENU

Select a parameter via the corresponding function key


(F1 to F5).

Set the value of the parameter via the function keys.


F1

F1

increases the value in large steps

F2

F2

increases the value in small steps

F4

F4

increases the value in small steps

F5

F5

decreases the value in large steps

In some of the SETUP menus F3

F3

has a special

function.

After entering a value, the changed value must be


confirmed by pressing the RETURN

key.

Enter password (see Password request on page 91).


Return or leave the SETUP menus using ESC (ABORT)
ESC

REG - D Operating Manual

47

REG - D
The SETUP menus will be automatically exited if no key is
pressed for approx. 15 seconds.

Once the desired parameters have been entered, checked,


and confirmed with RETURN
, the REG-D Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be switched
back into automatic operation mode using AUTOMATIC
OPERATION MODE
.
AUTO

4.3

Selecting the display mode

After pressing the MENU


key, the display modes of the
REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can
be selected.
MENU

The following modes are available:

Regulator mode
Transducer mode
Recorder mode
Statistics mode
ParaGramer mode
Regulator mode

The F1

F1

key is used to select the Regulator Mode.


The display indicates the set setpoint
value in V (kV) and as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, the momentary
actual value, the value of the
permissible regulative deviation and the
current tap-changer position of the tapchanging transformer.

In addition the current deviation of the


setpoint is indicated (by a pointer) on a
scale with a bandwidth of 10%.

The colour of the scales pointer will change from


transparent to solid black if the set permissible regulative
deviation (tolerance band) is overshot or undershot.
If required, the present value of the current may also be
displayed.

48

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Note

If the term Actual Value is displayed in capital


letters as ACTUAL VALUE, then the MEASUREMENT
VALUE SIMULATION is active!
(see page 143).

The F2

F2

key is used to select the Transducer

Mode.

Transducer
mode

When the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


carries out measurements in the Aron circuit (feature M2), a
second transducer screen can be selected to display the
measured values of the three-phase current networks loaded
according to the requirements of the user.
The second transducer screen can be selected by pressing
either the

or

key.

REG - D Operating Manual

49

REG - D
The third transducer screen may be selected by pressing either
the

or

key.

In the transducer mode, only the reactive current I sin of each


transformer will be displayed. However, it is not possible to
determine on the basis of this display which share of the current
pertains to the load and which pertains to the reactive current.
Therefore, for parallel switching it is useful to display the
reactive current.
The circulating active current Icirc indicates the share of the
current that is circulating in the parallel-switched
transformers, not the share taken up by the load.
The quasi-analogue scale illustrates the relationship between
the circulating reactive current Icirc and the permissible
circulating reactive current perm. Icirc.
If the circulating current becomes zero, the quotient will also
become zero and the pointer will be positioned in the middle of
the scale.
However, generally speaking, this ideal situation can in practice
only then be reached when the parallel-switched transformers
exhibit the same electrical features.

50

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The F3

F3

key is used to select the Recorder Mode.

As standard, every Relay


for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring is
equipped with a DEMO
recorder (feature: DEMO in
the lower left corner of the
grid).

Recorder mode

Present
value

Above the grid, the set


permissible regulative
deviation is displayed by means of two black arrows. In this
manner, the recorder display is capable of supplying all of the
information needed for operating the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring (see LCD Display Recorder Mode
on page 44).
In addition to the value of the actual voltage and the tapchanger position (in the lower left-hand corner), the display also
indicates the permissible regulative deviation (black arrows
above the grid) and the change of the voltage over a period of
time (past values).
Within the grid, the actual voltage is the value which intersects
the lower line of the two parallel border lines at the top of the
grid.
Independent of the selected feedrate speed (F4), the memory
stores values at a constant rate of 1 second.
Each 1 second value is composed of 10 100ms values.
Seven scale divisions are available in total on the display. Thus,
a maximum time range of 7 x 10 minutes (70 minutes) may be
shown on the screen.
The shortest time range with the biggest optical resolution is 7
x 14 seconds (98 seconds).
Apart from the voltage, the recorder can also record the current
and the angle . The tap-changer position and the setpoint
value with tolerance band are always recorded as well.
In the second recorder menu (F3-F3), the desired mode can be
selected via the menu item Number of channels (F4). It is
possible to change modes at any time without loss of data.
Displaying the recorder data
In the first recorder menu (F3), the menu item Dual Display (F4)
can be used to switch the recorder display between the oneREG - D Operating Manual

51

REG - D
channel display of U and the two-channel display of U (left) and
I (right). The time axis is the same for both curves; dx only
changes the resolution of U, whereas the scale for I remains the
same.
Derived variables from the recorder data
In the first recorder menu (F3,F3), the
menu item MMU display (F5) can be
used to switch the display of variables
derived from the cursor value (at the
very top) on and off.
If only two recorder channels (U+I) have
been selected (second recorder menu
(F3,F3,F4)), I and S will be displayed as
numeric values.
If all three recorder channels (U + I + ) are activated, then I, ,
P and Q will be displayed as numeric values.
It is also possible to search for an event in the second recorder
menu. If both the date and the time of a certain event are
known, this data can be selected in the Time Search
submenu of the second recorder menu.
After returning to the recorder main menu (by pressing F3 or
Enter), the recorder lists the selected time and displays all of the
selected electrical measured values as well as the
corresponding tap-changes.

52

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The F4

F4

key is used to select the Statistics

Statistics mode

Mode.

The total number of tap-changes made


since the counter was last set to zero is
shown on the display. Thus tapchanges made under load and tapchanges made with a load of less than
5% of the nominal current In (1 A or 5 A)
are distinguishable.
Changes made under load are
additionally displayed for each tapchange.
Note

If the tap-changer is working under load (I > 0.05 In), a


double arrow >> indicates the present tap-changer
position.
If the load condition is not fulfilled, the present tapchanger position will be indicated by a single arrow >.

In conjunction with the recorder, the statistics mode provides


valuable information regarding the controlled system.
The parameters Time factor and Permissible regulative
deviation can be used to reach an optimum between the
voltage stability and the number of tap-changes. However, this
relation cannot be calculated mathematically as it is subject to
the individual conditions at the respective feeding point.

The F5

F5

key is used to select the Paragramer

Paragramer

Mode.

The PARAGRAMER is a tool used for


automatically preparing parallel
connections and for one-line
visualisation of the switching status.
The artificial word PARAGRAMER is
derived from the terms parallel and
one-line diagram.
The PARAGRAMER displays the
switching status of the individual transformers in one-line
graphics and can be loaded by pressing the F5 key in the main
menu.

REG - D Operating Manual

53

REG - D
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and
bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can
independently recognise which transformer should work in
parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.
The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one
single busbar.
As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are
working on busbar a, whereas transformer T2 is feeding into
busbar b.
If special crosslinks are needed
between the busbars, we recommend
that you contact the headquarters of
our company A. Eberle GmbH & Co.
KG for assistance, since it is not
possible to describe all the options in
this operating manual.

Crosslink

The crosslinks feature is depicted in


the graphic. With its assistance, two
busbars may be coupled crosswise.

Setup menus

MENU

4.4

MENU

is used to select SETUP menu 1

Lamp check

Press the F5

key to check the functions of the lightemitting diodes on the front panel.
F5

Note

This check can only be carried out in the Regulator


Mode or Statistics Mode.

54

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
4.5

Resetting fault signals

To reset fault signals that occur, the operation mode must be


changed from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL and then back to
AUTOMATIC again.

4.6

Operating the Recorder


Time-reference
line
F3

F1

F1

and F2

F2

allow access to historical values.

The time and date corresponding to a particular event can be


found by pressing F1
and F2
and travelling back
along the voltage-time diagram to the time reference line (at the
top of the grid), and then reading the values of the time, date,
voltage and tap-changing position that are located under the
grid.
F1

F2

If historical data is displayed, the term HIST appears in the


lower left-hand corner of the grid. The displaying of historical
values can be cancelled at any time by pressing ESC (ABORT)
ESC

The F3
key is used to open the Recorder 1 menu, where
the size of the scroll displacement (when searching via the
F3

F1
and F2
keys in recorder mode) can be set under
the menu item Scroll. This helps to speed up the search
procedure. It is also possible to switch back and forth between
Dual Display and MMU display in the Recorder 1 menu.
F1

F2

Pressing the F3
key in the Recorder 1 menu will take you
to the Recorder 2 menu. In this menu a specific search date
and time can be set under the menu item Time Search.
Different displays (U, U+I or U+I+Phi) can be selected under the
menu item Channel Display.
F3

After returning to the recorder mode again by pressing F3


,
the time-line diagram for the selected point in time appears.
F3

REG - D Operating Manual

55

REG - D
The Recorder 1 and Recorder 2 menus display the present fill
level of the memory in % as well as in days.

F3

F1

F3

F1

56

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

F4

F4

F5

The feedrate speed can be selected by pressing the F4


key. Four different times can be selected: 14 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10
min.
F4

The dt values refer to the time which must pass before a scale
section (division) is recorded.

F4

REG - D Operating Manual

dT = 14s
dT = 1m
dT = 5m
dT = 10m

57

REG - D
The F5
dx key is used to change the scale of the
recorder display.
F5

An extension of WinREG permits the data to be read out.


The data may be filed and stored on the PC from version 1.78
onwards.
In addition to WinREG, MS Excel with the Storing and
Recording Add-On can also be used as an evaluating
program.
Note

If the note DEMO appears in the lower left-hand


corner of the grid of the regular recorder display, the
recorder is operating in demo mode. In this operation
mode, the recorder only records the measured values
for a period of 4 - 6 hours. After this period, the older
values are replaced by the new ones.

58

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5

Commissioning

This chapter will help you to become familiar with the REG-D
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as quickly
as possible.
The following will summarise each parameterisation step that is
required during the commissioning stage and indicate the
appropriate chapter in this operating manual where further
information can be found.
Please follow the order of the commissioning steps.
A summary of the limit values with a short explanation and links
to the appropriate chapters can be found on page 82
Whilst the parameterisation can be implemented using the
WinREG parameterisation program, this chapter only deals with
parameterisation using the device keypad.
The parameters that are particularly important for voltage
regulation will be briefly mentioned in seven steps and the
parameterisation explained.
Further settings that are required in special cases can be found
in chapter 7.
After applying the operating voltage, the
REG-D will indicate that it is in regulator mode.
Other modes, such as transducer mode, recorder mode,
statistics mode and paragramer mode, can be selected at any
time.
Therefore it is important to realise that all modes run parallel to
each other in the background. If one selects the recorder mode
(for example), the regulating tasks and all the other
paramaterised task settings will also naturally be processed.
Press MENU and then use the keys
F2 ... F5 to select the desired mode.
The individual operating modes are briefly described below.
In total, six SETUPs are designed for the parameterisation.
You can scroll through the individual SETUPs in the following
manner:
Starting at the main menu (regulator, transducer, recorder,
statistics or paragramer), press MENU to enter SETUP 1.
Repeatedly pressing the MENU key selects SETUP 2 to SETUP
6.
REG - D Operating Manual

59

REG - D
If you are already in one of the SETUPs, you can reach all the
other menus by pressing the and keys.

Caution!

Please observe the Warnings and Notes on page 9


without fail!

60

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.1

Regulator mode
R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

After the auxiliary voltage is applied, the Relay for Voltage


Control & Transformer Monitoring indicates that it is in regulator
mode.
The important parameters for assessing a regulation situation
are shown in this display mode.
The tap-changer position and the actual regulative deviation are
shown in addition to the actual voltage value. The actual
regulative deviation is shown in quasi-analogue form.
If the pointer is at 0 the actual value is the same as the
setpoint value. If the regulative deviation is within the tolerance
range the pointer is transparent. If the regulative deviation is
outside the permissible regulative deviation the pointer changes
to black.
In this way one can judge the present condition of the controlled
system at a glance.
An alternative display with additional information the compact
display can be selected using the F1 key.
In addition to the actual value and the tap-changer position, the
setpoint value in V (kV) and % as well as the permissible
regulative deviation in % are shown in this display.
If you prefer the large display, simply press the F1 key again.

REG - D Operating Manual

61

REG - D
5.2

Transducer mode
R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

Press MENU and then select the transducer mode using the F2
key.
Various important measurement quantities are shown in this
mode.
The voltage, current and frequency are independent of the
connection of the measurement quantities, whereas the
outputs can only be displayed correctly when the measurement
sources are correctly entered.
The Relay with feature M1 only gives exact measurement
values in equally loaded 3-phase networks. In this case, the
transducer emanates from a symmetrical loading of all lines,
and measures only one current and one voltage.
For this reason, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring must know the source of the voltages (L1L2, L2L3,
L3L1) and currents (L1, L2, L3) in order to be able to take the
angle between the input quantities into consideration.
If measurements are to be taken in a 3-phase network loaded
according to the requirements of the user, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring must be equipped with
feature M2.
Note

62

The I sin current is particularly important for parallelswitching transformers.

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.3

Recorder mode
R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

The measured line voltage and the tap-changing position are


recorded in Recorder mode.
Each second a measurement value that is the arithmetic
average of 10 100ms measurements is stored in the memory
for the voltage.
The memory capacity is more than 18.7 days, although this
time is only valid when each value measured per second differs
from the value recorded the previous second.
In practice the memory usage is such that at least a month of
data can be saved.
The saved values can either be recalled using the keypad, or
transferred to a PC and analysed there using the WinREG
parameterisation program (e.g. with Excel).

REG - D Operating Manual

63

REG - D
5.4

Statistics mode
R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

In statistics mode, tap-changes under load and tap-changes


when idling are differentiated and recorded separately.
The load condition is fulfilled if a current is measured that is 5%
larger than the entered nominal value.
(Example: for In = 1 A 50 mA; for In = 5 A 250 mA).
Under load conditions every tap-change is recorded and
displayed.
A double arrow before a particular change indicates that the
transformer is running under load and is on the displayed level.
A single arrow signals that the transformer is idling.

64

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.5

Paragramer mode
R E G

- D
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

A U T O

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

The PARAGRAMER is a tool used for automatically preparing


parallel connections and for one-line visualisation of the
switching statuses.
The artificial word PARAGRAMER is derived from the terms
parallel and one-line diagram.
The PARAGRAMER displays the switching status of the
individual transformers in one-line graphics and can be loaded
by pressing the F5 key in the main menu.
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and
bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can
independently recognise which transformer should work in
parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.
The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one
single busbar.
As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are
working on busbar a, whereas transformer T2 is feeding into
busbar b.

REG - D Operating Manual

65

REG - D
5.6

Choosing the language

Please select SETUP 5, F1, F1


Press F5 to view all of the selectable languages.
F1

2x

F5

Select the desired language with F2 or F4 and confirm the


selection using F3.

5.7

Setpoint value

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


can manage up to four setpoint values.
However, in general only one fixed value is used.
Please select SETUP 1, F3, F2.

F2
F3

The setpoint value can be increased using F1 and F2 and


decreased using F4 and F5.
Press the F3 key if the setpoint value entered should be
interpreted as a 100% value.
Press Enter to store the settings.
Note

If the transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage


transformer is specified in a procedure carried out later,
then the primary voltage appears in kV in the second
row of the setpoint menu.

66

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.8

Permissible regulative deviation Xwz

There are two limits for setting the regulative deviation.


One limit is determined from the acceptable voltage tolerance
specified by the consumer, the other is defined by the tapchange increment of the transformer.
The minimum voltage range can be calculated using the
following equation:

Xwz[%] 0.6 tap-change


increment[%]
Xwz: Permissible regulative deviation
If a regulative deviation Xwz that is smaller than the tap-change
increment of the transformer is selected, the controlled system
can never reach a stable condition; the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will continue to increment in
steps.
Please choose SETUP 1, F1.
F1

The permissible regulative deviation can be increased using F1


and F2 and decreased using F4 and F5.
The parameter is confirmed by pressing Enter.

REG - D Operating Manual

67

REG - D
5.9

Time behaviour

The golden rule for multiple feeding points is: a calm network
As a consequence, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should be set up in such a manner that as few
switching operations as possible are carried out.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be
calmed by increasing either the permissible regulative deviation
(Xwz) or the time factor.
However, this course of action has its limits when the interests
of the recipients are violated in an impermissible manner
(voltage deviations are too large or last too long).
The standard defined reaction time tB must be changed when
using the time factor option to influence the number of
regulation events.
The default algorithm dU t = const. ensures that small regulative
deviations may be present for a long time, before a tap-change
is triggered, whereas large deviations are rectified more quickly.
The time factor has been included as an option to influence the
reaction time tB of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring. The time factor is set to 1 as factory default. The
time tB is multiplied with the time factor and the result is the
reaction time tv of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring.

tv = tB time factor
The value of the time factor must be multiplied with the reaction
time taken from the diagram.

68

REG - D Operating Manual

Reaction time tB [sec] for time factor: 1

REG - D

25
Set permissible
regulative deviation

20
15
10
5
0

0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]

10

Example:
Present regulative deviation
Xw = 4%;
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 2%
tv = tB time factor
(range of the time factor: 0.1 ... 30
see SETUP 1, F2, F3)
with time factor: 1: 15 sec;
with time factor: 2: 30 sec.

Note

In practice, a time factor between 2 and 3 is used.


However, a general recommendation cannot be given,
since the correct time factor is dependent on both the
network and the customer configuration.
Please select SETUP 1, F2, F3 and enter the time factor using
F1, F2 and F4, F5.

REG - D Operating Manual

69

REG - D

F2
F3

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.


The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
offers several time programs.
In addition to the default-selected dU t = const. integral
method, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring offers a fast integral method, a linear method and a
further method working with a fixed times that can be found
under the name CONST.
If CONST is selected, all regulative deviations that lie outside the
tolerance band and that are smaller than the selected
permissible deviation are rectified within time T1. For larger
regulative deviations, however, the time will be T2.

Example:
The selected permissible regulative deviation is 1%.
Reaction time T1 is valid in the range from 1% to 2%. The Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring carries out tapchanges according to the time selected for T2 if the regulative
deviation is larger than 2% (calculated from the setpoint value!).
For further information see page 247.

70

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.10

Backward high-speed switching

While the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is


operating according to the algorithm dU t = const., events will
always be regulated such that the next tap-change will be
triggered after a short time for large deviations and after a long
time for small deviations.
Example:
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz:

1%

Present regulative deviation Xw:

+6%

Time factor:

Tap-change increment of the transformer:

1.5%

Reaction time tB [sec] for time factor: 1

The curve below gives a time of 42 s, the time within which the
fault will be rectified.
High-speed switching can be used to reduce this time.
If, in the above example, the high-speed switching limit were set
to 6%, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
would switch the voltage back to the permissible range of the
voltage tolerance band as soon as this limit is reached and the
selected time delay for high-speed mode has passed.

25
20

Set permissible
regulative deviation

Tap-change 4

15
10

Tap-change 3
Tap-change 2

5
0

Tap-change 1

0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]

REG - D Operating Manual

10

71

REG - D
Diagram:
Present regulative deviation
Xw = 6%;
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 1%
tv = tB time factor
with time factor: 1:
1st tap-change after 5 s
2nd tap-change after 7 s
3rd tap-change after 10 s
4th tap-change after 20 s
___________________________
Total time =
42 s
Please select SETUP 3, F4 and select backward high-speed
switching using F3. Then enter the desired limit as a % of the
setpoint value.

F4

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.


The time delay can be set in SETUP 4, F4 after backward highspeed switching has been activated.

F4

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.

72

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.11

Tap-changer running time

If the high-speed switching limit is reached, then the running


time of the tap-changer determines the time required for the
voltage to return to being within the tolerance band.
If the running time of the tap-changer is specified, other control
signals can be prevented from being output when the tapchanger is running.
Old tap-changing devices in particular may occasionally
respond with an EMERGENCY STOP signal, if a further control
signal is input at the same moment that the tap-changer is
changing to a new position.
The running time of the tap-changer can be entered in menu
AddOns-1.
Please select SETUP 5, F1.
F1

If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is


operating in high-speed switching mode, two seconds will be
added to the entered running time. The Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will not issue a new control
command until this entire running time has elapsed.
Note

This function will be carried out by the (PAN-D) voltage


monitoring unit if the unit is present in the regulating
system.
Extension:
Two further settings in SETUP 5 enable the running time of the
tap-changer to be monitored.
The tap-change in operation lamp (TC) signal can be connected
to one of the freely programmable inputs (E3 in this case).
(SETUP 5, F3).
REG - D Operating Manual

73

REG - D

F3

A freely programmable relay (in this case relay 5) can be used


for fault reporting (TC-Err).

F4

TC-Err+

transmits a wiping signal in the event of a fault

TC-Err.

transmits a permanent signal in the event of a


fault

This signal can be used to stop the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring or turn off the motor drive.

74

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.12

Knx transformer mounting ratios and


transformer connection

This point can be skipped if only the secondary transformer


voltage is required for regulation and the transducer functions
of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring are
not required.
In all other cases, the transformer mounting ratios and the
sources of both the current and the voltage must be named.
If it is specified via the REG-D menu that the current transformer
is connected to external connector L3 and that the voltage to
be measured is between L1 and L2, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring corrects the 90 angle by
itself and delivers the correct values for all the outputs and for
the reactive current I sin .
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F1
Select the source of the voltage that is to be regulated using F2
or F4 and confirm the selection by using F3 or Enter.

F1
F2

Knu is the quotient of the input voltage and the output voltage
of the voltage transformer and ensures that the primary voltage
is displayed (e.g. 20 kV and not 100V).
Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 or F4 and
confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

REG - D Operating Manual

75

REG - D
Select SETUP 5, F2, F2

F2

F2

Example:
Primary voltage:

20 kV

Secondary voltage:

100 V

Knu = 20 kV / 0.1 kV
Knu = 200
The voltage is measured by the voltage transformer between L2
and L3, and the current transformer is connected to phase L3.

Select SETUP 5, F2
Select the voltage L2L3 using F1 and confirm the selection
using F3

Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 and


confirm the selection with the ENTER key

Select the current transformer mounting location L3 using


F3 and confirm the selection with F3

76

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.13

Setting the nominal current

In general it is not necessary to supply the Relay for Voltage


Control & Transformer Monitoring with a current to perform
voltage regulation.
If, however, a current-dependent setpoint adjustment is
required or the output data should be displayed, a power
supply must be provided.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can
operate with 1 A and 5 A input signals.
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F4.

F2

F4

Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

Caution!

Please note: in addition to the software setting, a jumper


must also be placed in the correct position on the REGNTZ2 terminal block for the REG-D Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring.

Assignment
With jumper Without jumper

In the case of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &


Transformer Monitoring, the number of current transformers to
be connected is determined by the hardware feature selected.

REG - D Operating Manual

77

REG - D
In normal applications, only subprint M1 is equipped. In cases
such as, for example, when three-phase current networks
loaded according to the requirements of the user or triplewound applications are to be operated, subprint M2 is
equipped as well and must be set to the nominal current
transformer value in the same way.
Kni is the quotient of the input current and the output current of
the current transformer.
Example:
Primary current:

600 A

Secondary current:

5A

Kni = 600 A / 5 A
Kni = 120
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F5

F2

F5

Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

78

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.14

Inhibit low limit

Scenario:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates with a 110 kV / 20 kV transformer.
Problems on the high voltage side cause the voltage to break
down slowly.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring rectifies
this and increases the tap-changes of the transformer, to
stabilise the voltage on the secondary side at 20 kV.
As soon as a fault on the primary side is eliminated, the primary
voltage jumps back to the original voltage value.
However, since tap changes in the direction of a higher voltage
were carried out as a result of the voltage breakdown (amongst
other things), the secondary voltage is so high that problems on
the secondary side can no longer be precluded (protective relay
triggered, etc.).

Requirement:
If the voltage that is to be regulated falls beneath a particular
limit due to a fault on the primary or secondary side, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring shouldnt
undertake further attempts to raise the voltage.
This requirement can only be achieved using the inhibit low
limit.
Please select SETUP 3, F5.

F5

F1, F2 and F4, F5 can be used to enter a percentage value


beneath which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring does not try to rectify a voltage breakdown.
As soon as the voltage increases above the entered value
REG - D Operating Manual

79

REG - D
again, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
automatically restarts the regulation by itself.
In order to prevent short-term voltage breakdowns triggering
the inhibit low of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring, a time delay after which the inhibit low will be
activated can be entered in SETUP 4, F5 using F1, F2, F4 or F5.
Please select SETUP 4, F5.

F5

Example:
Setpoint value 100 V
If a voltage of < 90 V occurs for a period longer than 10
seconds, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should change to inhibit low.

80

Input of inhibit low limit:


SETUP 3, F5
Input:

-10%

Time delay input:


SETUP 4, F5

10 seconds

Input:

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
5.15

Triggering

The trigger limit describes the entered voltage as an absolute


value, above which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring suppresses all control commands.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
automatically starts regulation by itself if the voltage falls
beneath this value (see also page 236).
Please select SETUP 3, F3

F3

Select the trigger value using the F1, F2 and F4, F5 keys and
confirm the selection using the ENTER key.
Please select SETUP 4, F3

F3

C
hoose the time delay for the triggering using the F1, F2 and F4,
F5 keys and confirm the selection using the ENTER key.
The limit signals can also be connected to the relay outputs /
binary outputs (see Relay assignments on page 139).
In addition, the Trigger signal can also be indicated by the
programmable LEDs (see LED assignments on page 141).

REG - D Operating Manual

81

REG - D
5.16

Short description of the individual limit


values, the setpoint values and the
permissible regulative deviation.

G1

Trigger

G2

Backward highspeed switching

G4

>U

Setpoint

Permissible
regulative deviatio
<U
Forward highspeed switching
Undervoltage
inhibit low

G6
G3
G8
Tap-changes
Raise
Lower

5.16.1

Description of the individual settings

Setpoint value:
The value that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should regulate the voltage to.
The setpoint value can be displayed in primary or secondary
values.
Secondary values: e.g. 100V or 110V
Primary values: e.g. 11 kV, 20 kV, 33 kV, 110 kV
The primary values can be displayed by parameterising the
transformer mounting ratio Knu (0.01 ... 4000)
Setting range of the voltage setpoint values: 60 ... 140 V
Further information: see Setpoints on page 105

82

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz:
Since the transformer mounting ratio of a tap-change
transformer cannot be continuously changed, there must be a
voltage range surrounding the setpoint that the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring cannot affect.
This range is designated as the permissible tolerance band or
the permissible regulative deviation.
The lower limit of the tolerance band depends on the tapchanging increments of the transformer.
If the tolerance band is set so that it is smaller than the tapchanging increment, then the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring hunts the setpoint value and
repeatedly steps away from the tolerance band in both positive
and negative directions.
If, on the other hand, the entered tolerance band is too large, it
could lead to complaints from consumers because the voltage
fluctuates over a large range.
Setting range: 0.1 ... 10%
The entered percent value always refers to the selected
setpoint value.
Further information: see Permissible regulative deviation on
page 103

Trigger (G1):
Triggering describes an upper absolute voltage limit, which
causes the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
to stop carrying out tap-changes.
The limit is described on the display in plain text and if required
it can also activate a relay that either triggers a protective device
or simply delivers the information to the control panel.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates in the normal manner if the voltage is below the limit.
The setting range of the trigger is 100 ... 150 V (can only be
entered as a secondary value!).
The voltage is to understood as the output voltage of the
voltage transformer on the secondary side of the transformer
and can only be entered as an absolute value.
REG - D Operating Manual

83

REG - D
Reason: If the trigger limit were based on the setpoint value
(for example) and several setpoint values were used, the trigger
limit would wander with the setpoint.
If, however, there is a fixed limit for the voltage above which the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is stopped
and a protective element is triggered, it is an absolute value
rather than a relative value.
Further information: see Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value
of the voltage) on page 113

Backward high-speed switching (G2):


If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time
program is activated. The time program defines the amount of
time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further)
control commands.
All time programs are based on the assumption that large
voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are
rectified slowly.
The backward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage
above which the time program is ignored and the transformer
is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The
voltage band is defined by the permissible regulative deviation
parameter.
The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the
transformer per switching process.
If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp
has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no
tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching
frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation
parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2)
Setting range: 0 ... +35% *
Further information: see High-speed switching when
overvoltage occurs (LOWER) on page 114

84

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Forward high-speed switching (G3):
If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time
program is activated. The time program defines the amount of
time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further)
control commands.
All time programs are based on the assumption that large
voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are
rectified slowly.
The forward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage
above which the time program is ignored and the transformer
is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The
voltage band is defined by the permissible regulative deviation
parameter.
The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the
transformer per switching process.
If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp
has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no
tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching
frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation
parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2)
Setting range: -35% ... 0% *
Further information: see High-speed switching when
undervoltage occurs (RAISE) on page 114

Overvoltage >U (G4):


The overvoltage >U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage exceeds the >U limit, all raise commands are
surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for >U.
Setting range: 0 ... +25% *
REG - D Operating Manual

85

REG - D
Further information: see > U Overvoltage on page 112

Undervoltage <U (G6):


The undervoltage <U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all lower commands are
surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for <U.
Setting range: -25% ... 0% *
Further information: see < U Undervoltage on page 111

Inhibit low (G8):


If the voltage falls below the undervoltage inhibit low limit, the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring switches to
a standstill.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates in the normal manner as long as the voltage is above
the limit.
Setting range: -75% ... 0% *
Further information: see Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs
on page 115

* The percent values relate to the appropriate setpoint value,


100 V or 110 V.
Select the reference value in SETUP 5, Add-On 5, F2

86

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
6

Basic Settings

The following are considered to be basic settings of the Relay


for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring: Time, password,
interfaces (COM1, COM2, E-LAN), LCD contrast, etc.
All of the basic settings can be defined and modified in SETUP
menu 6.

6.1

General
F1

F1

6.1.1

Station ID
A to Z4
F2

Note

Relays which are operated on a bus (E-LAN) must be


identified by different addresses (A ... Z4).

REG - D Operating Manual

87

REG - D
6.1.2

Station name

Note

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


name is best entered using WinREG. However, it can
also be entered using the Relay keypad and the
following procedure.

F3

F1

F1

F2

88

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

F3

6.1.3

Setting the time/date

F4

6.1.4

LCD contrast (display)

F5

REG - D Operating Manual

89

REG - D
6.1.5

Password

The password prevents changes to individual settings.


Measurements and parameters can, however, be read without
restrictions.
The password lock is activated after approx. 4 min.

F2

Note

User 1 may change all passwords at will, whereas all of


the other users can only change their own personal
password.
Deleting passwords
Enter 111111.
It is only possible to delete a password if user 1 has opened
the device with his/her password!
Note

This procedure switches off the entire password


request (including that of other users!).
The passwords of users 2 to 5 (only) are deleted.

90

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Password request

F3

Wrong password

Enter
Correct
Password

F3

6.1.6

Deleting recorder data


(resetting the measured value memory)

F3

The recorder
memory will
be deleted after
pressing

i h R
6.1.7

Deleting tap-change sums


(resetting the tap-counter to zero)

F4

The total number of


tap-changes will
be reset to zero
after pressing

i h R
REG - D Operating Manual

91

REG - D
6.1.8

Actual value correction of the measuring


voltage UE

The actual value correction of the measuring voltage is


designed to compensate for the line resistance and to correct
measuring transducer errors.

F5

6.1.9

Actual value correction of the measuring


current IE

The actual value correction of the measuring current corrects


errors in the measuring transducer.

F5

F3

Note

If the parameters are read out and archived via WinREG,


the values of the actual value corrections will be missing,
because they can only be assigned to a certain device
and are not transferable to other devices!

92

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
6.2

RS-232 Interfaces

6.2.1

COM 1

The COM 1 interface is normally used to parameterise the Relay


for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with the help of
the WinREG software.

F2

F2

F3

F4

REG - D Operating Manual

93

REG - D

F5

6.2.2

COM 2

COM 2 is suitable for connecting a REG-D Relay for Voltage


Control & Transformer Monitoring or a REGSys regulation
system (several Relays and monitoring units) to a higher-level
control system.
If the COM 2 interface is used for permanent connections to a
higher-level control system, the COM 1 interface is available for
connecting a PC, a printer or a modem.
F1

F2

The standard mode is the MODE ECL. DCF77 is only


selectable if the time is to be synchronised via DCF77.

94

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
If the information of the E-LANs (LAN-L, LAN-R) is to be
rerouted to the serial interface, for example to achieve modem
transmissions on the E-LAN level, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring must be set to LAN-L or
LAN-R. A more detailed description has been omitted here
since these types of connections should always be realised with
the support of our company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG.
PROFESSIONAL is always the right setting for the COM, if a
PROFIBUS-DP connection is to be realised.
In this case an external PROFIBUS-DP module is controlled via
COM 1 or COM 2.
The setting ECL+HP enables output which is generated via a
background program to also be output via COM 2.
Example:
Based on the regulated voltage or the tap-changer position, a
specific text is to be output via COM 2. In this case, ECL+HP is
to be selected, since all output which is generated via a
background program is normally output via COM 1.

F3

F4

REG - D Operating Manual

95

REG - D

F5

6.3

E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)

For background information on the E-LAN, please see page


258.
Every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has
two complete E-LAN interfaces.
E-LAN LEFT defines the settings for bus left
(socket connector 6, terminals b6, b8, b10 and b12 see page
33).
E-LAN RIGHT defines the settings for bus right
(socket connector 6, terminals z6, z8, z10 and z12 see page
33).
Each one of these E-LAN interfaces also functions with either a
2-wire line or 4-wire transmission technology (RS485).

Socket connector 6
BUS-L
BUS-R
Function 2-wire
Terminal Terminal

4-wire

b6

z6

EA+

Input and output + Output +

b8

z8

EA-

Input and output - Output -

b10

z10

E+

No function

Input +

b12

z12

E-

No function

Input -

A 2-wire line is normally used, because this is the only system


that allows one bus configuration with several stations on the
same bus line. To do so, the integrated terminating resistor of
the first and the last stations on the bus line must be switched
on. (Selection: terminated)

96

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Normal functioning of the bus would be impossible without a
terminating resistor due to the reflections which would then
appear on the end of each line.
4-wire transmission technology must be used for long
transmission distances or if boosters (amplifiers for increasing
the signal level over very long transmission distances must be
used). The required terminating resistances will be
automatically activated (the selection terminated is no
longer required).

F3

F1

F2

F4

F2

F4

REG - D Operating Manual

97

REG - D

F3

F5

6.4

PAN-D voltage monitoring unit

F4

Parameterisation of
PAN - D (refer to
PAN - D operating
manual)

(See appendix for REG-D / PAN-D circuit diagram)


The PAN-D monitoring unit is not equipped for entering the
parameters via the screen and keypad.
If a PAN-D monitoring unit is used in connection with a REG-D
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring connected
via E-LAN, the monitoring unit borrows the keypad and the
screen from the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring for parameterising and displaying values.
Use the F4 key to start this process.

98

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
6.5

Status
(actual ID data of the REG-D Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring)

The menu item Status lists all of the information which is


important for the system identification.
In addition to the firmware version and the status of the battery,
etc., the actual input status of both input circuits is monitored
as a hexadecimal number in the REG-D status (1).
This information is particularly useful for commissioning. The
hexadecimal numbers should be interpreted as follows:
Inputs

Inputs

Inputs

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Signal
x

Signal

Significance
8

= HEX A

= HEX F

Signal
x

Significance
8

Inputs

= HEX 7

Signal
x

Significance
8

Significance
8

= HEX D

x = ON
= OFF

The input status shown above would be displayed in the status


as HEX AF7D.
During the initial commissioning of the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring, this enables clarification as to
whether or not a signal has been sent to the terminals.

F5

REG-IN1

REG - D Operating Manual

gives information about the present


input situation of
terminal block 2 (REG-EA)
in hexadecimal numbers.

99

REG - D
REG-IN2

gives information about the present


input situation of
terminal block 4 (REG-STU)
in hexadecimal numbers.

Use the arrow key


to open a window, in which the active
device features are listed.

Use the arrow key


to open a window which shows the
parameterisation of the COM 1 and COM 2 interfaces.

Use the arrow key


to open a window which shows the
parameterisation of the ELAN interfaces.

100

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Use the arrow key
to open a window which shows the
parameterisation of the COM 3 interface.

Use the arrow key


logbook.

to open a window which shows the

All important events are stored in the log together with the
respective time and date. Up to 127 events can be stored in
total. The LOG memory is a First In First Out (FIFO) rotating
memory, i.e. if the memory is full, the oldest entry will be
replaced with the newest event.
Use the keys F2 ... F5 to search for a particular entry.

The following events are saved with a time and date:


Power ON
Manual
Automatic
Local
Remote
<U
<U
>I
Forward high-speed switching
Backwards high-speed switching
Trigger
Inhibit Low

REG - D Operating Manual

101

REG - D
7

Parameterisation of the REG-D

The most important steps for the parameterisation are also


described in the separate short-form operating manual in
chapter Commissioning on page 59.

The operation modes LOCAL and MANUAL

must

be set in order to enter parameters.


Note

Changes to the parameters are only accepted when in


MANUAL OPERATION MODE
.
When the password request is activated, a valid
password must be entered (for information on the
password request see Password request on page 91).
For further information on the Operating principle, please see
page 47.

102

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.1

Permissible regulative deviation

For background information on the permissible regulative


deviation, please see page 233.
F1

7.2

Time behaviour (regulation behaviour)

7.2.1

Time factor

For background information on the Time Factor, please see


page 257.

F2

F3

REG - D Operating Manual

103

REG - D
7.2.2

Time program

For background information on the time program, see page


247.

F2

F2

7.2.3

Trend memory

For background information, see Trend memory on page 251.

F2

F4

104

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.3

Setpoints

For background information on the setpoint value (command


variable) please see page 222.
Display of the setpoint value
If the primary value (the single-underlined value (here: 15 kV))
should be displayed rather than the secondary value, the
transformer mounting ratio must be entered in the menu
Transformer configuration on page 131.

7.3.1

1st setpoint value

F3

F2

The U-LL voltage always corresponds to the phase-to-phase


voltage (delta voltage).
Example:
The setpoint should be 100.2 V. This value should be
simultaneously declared as the 100% value.
How to proceed:

Using the keys F1, F2, F3 and F4


set the double-underlined value to
100.2 V.
Use the F3 key to set the 100.2 V
value as the 100% value
and confirm the value by pressing the
RETURN

REG - D Operating Manual

key.

105

REG - D
7.3.2

Further setpoint values

F3

F3

Proceed accordingly with the 2nd, 3rd and 4th setpoint values.
When switching from one setpoint value to another, tapchanging commands will also be output at the same time until
the voltage lies within the tolerance band around the new
setpoint value. The time interval between two successive tapchanges is determined by the maximum time TC in operation
(SETUP 5, Add-On 1).
If the regulation is being operated with the PAN-D voltage
monitoring unit, the maximum time TC in operation must always
be entered directly on the PAN-D when both units are
connected via E-LAN.
Note

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring can regulate outputs (P or Q) as well as
voltages.
This situation will always occur if a phase-shift
transformer is used.
For this reason the PQCTRL feature must be loaded.
Setpoint 3 will then become a P setpoint, and setpoint
4 will become a Q setpoint.
The individual setpoints can be selected via the binary
inputs, via the COM 1 and COM 2 interfaces or via one
of the available protocols (IEC ...., DNP, MODBUS,
SPABUS, etc).

106

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.4

Programs
(parameters for parallel transformer
regulation)

For background information on Parallel Programs, please see


page 262.

F5

7.4.1

Selection of the parallel programs (regulation


programs)

F2

REG - D Operating Manual

107

REG - D
7.4.2

Parameters for the parallel program

Different parameter menus are available depending on the


selected parallel program.
The following menu appears for the I sin (circulating current
minimisation) program.
F1

Control influence (Icirc monitoring)


For further information about setting the permissible circulating
reactive current, please see page 266.
F1

Limitation
The Limitation menu item only appears when the cos
program is selected.

F2

108

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Net cos
The Limitation menu item only appears when the cos
program is selected.

F3

Nominal power of the transformer


The Limitation menu item only appears when the Isin(S)
program is selected.

F4

Group list (of parallel-switched transformers)


The group list must be entered for all programs, with the
exception of the cos procedure.

F5

Relays with the same prefixes before the identification (address)


are operating on one busbar. In this example, transformers A,
B and C are feeding on the same busbar.

REG - D Operating Manual

109

REG - D
7.4.3

Current influence (line-drop compensation)

For background information, please see see Determining the


voltage levels XR and Uf on page 226.
The gradient and the limitation for the current influences,
apparent current, active current and reactive current, are
entered in Setup 1 (F1 and F2).

F3

7.4.4

LDC parameter R (line-drop compensation)

For background information, please see see Measuring the


voltage drop as a function of the current strength and cos on
page 224.

F4

7.4.5

LDC parameter X (line-drop compensation)

For background information, please see see Measuring the


voltage drop as a function of the current strength and cos on
page 224.

F3

110

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.5

Gradient (U/I characteristic)

For background information on the Gradient,


please see page 227.
F1

7.6

Limitation (U/I characteristic)

For background information on the Limitation,


please see page 227.

F2

7.7

< U Undervoltage

For background information on < U Undervoltage,


please see page 238.

F3

REG - D Operating Manual

111

REG - D
7.8

> U Overvoltage

For background information on > U Overvoltage,


please see page 237.

F4

7.9

> I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits)

For background information on > I, < I limit value,


please see page 238.

F5

F3

112

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.10

Trigger inhibit high


(highest limit value of the voltage)

For background information on the trigger, please see page


236.

F3

Please note that the trigger must be entered as an absolute


value.
Reason: The respective setpoint is normally used as a reference
for setting the limit value.
However, if multiple setpoints are used, the trigger limit
wanders between the selected setpoints.
In general there is only one voltage independent of the
selected setpoint which triggers a transformer or outputs a
message, thus it is always better to enter the trigger limit in V.

REG - D Operating Manual

113

REG - D
7.11

High-speed switching during undervoltage/


overvoltage

7.11.1

High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs


(RAISE)

For background information about forward high-speed


switching, please see page 237.

F4

7.11.2

High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs


(LOWER)

For background information about backward high-speed


switching, please see page 236.

F4

F3

114

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.12

Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage
occurs

For background information on Inhibit Low,


please see page 239.

F5

7.13

Time delays (limit signals)

Note

Each parameter or limit value can function with an


individual switching delay!

7.13.1

Time Delay > U

For background information on the time delay,


please see to page 235.
F1

REG - D Operating Manual

115

REG - D
7.13.2

Time delay < U

For background information on the time delay,


please see page 235.

F3

7.13.3

Time delay > I, < I limit value

For background information on the time delay, please see page


235.

F2

7.13.4

Time delay trigger

For background information on the time delay,


please see page 235.

F3

116

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.13.5

Time delay forward high-speed switching

For background information on the time delay, please see page


235.

F4

7.13.6

Time delay backward high-speed switching

For background information on the switching delay, please see


page 235.

F4

F3

REG - D Operating Manual

117

REG - D
7.13.7

Time delay inhibit low

For background information on the time delay,


please see page 235.

F5

7.14

Add-Ons (Relay behaviour)

The various parameterisations are summarised under the AddOns menu item.
This menu item contains parameters that cannot be assigned
to other parameter groups. Furthermore, it contains some
parameters that could be assigned to particular parameter
groups, but which were not included where one might expect
to find them out of consideration of the existing SETUP
structure.
Therefore Add-Ons is a collection of parameters and special
functions that are often used for special customer
requirements.
In any cases, we recommend having an overview of the
individual screens.

7.14.1

Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6

Add-Ons contains six sub-menus (Add-On 1 to Add-On 6


that can be selected using the F1 key.
F1

118

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
F1

F1

F1

F1

REG - D Operating Manual

119

REG - D
7.14.2

Maximum time TC in operation (motor drive running


time)

F2

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be


used to monitor the running time of the motor drive (tapchanger). If the set maximum time has run out, a signal will be
triggered. This signal can be used to switch off the motor drive.
This protects the tap-changer against passing through all
cycles.
If the PAN-D monitoring unit is connected, the maximum time
TC in operation can only be set using the PAN-D (refer to the
PAN-D operating manual). For operation without PAN-D, the
running time can be monitored via the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring. To do this, first enter the maximum
running time of the tap-changer per tap in Add-On 1. The
maximum time TC in operation signal can then be assigned to
an input (refer to input assignments (binary inputs) or see Input
assignments (binary inputs) on page 138). Finally, the message
tap-changer interrupted can be output via a relay output (see
Relay assignments on page 139).
There are two ways to parameterise the relay:
1. Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F outputs a
continuous message when the specified maximum time is
exceeded.
2. Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F+ outputs a
temporary message when the specified maximum time is
exceeded.

120

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.14.3

Manual/Automatic

F3

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers


two different options for switching between the Manual and
AUTOMATIC operation modes.
In addition to the options already described above, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can also naturally be
switched using the serial COM interfaces or the IEC-, DNP-...
protocols.
If you wish to use a serial connection, it is always advisable to
contact our headquarters.
Flip/Flop switching behaviour
In the E5: PULSE position, a pulse at input E5 (b10/z10) (see
page 26) causes a changeover from MANUAL to
AUTOMATIC. A further pulse at this input would cause a
change-over from AUTOMATIC back to MANUAL, i.e. each
pulse changes the operating mode.
Bistable Switching Behaviour
In the E5-A/E6-H setting, a pulse or continuous signal to
input E5 (b10/z10) (see page 26) causes a changeover from
MANUAL to AUTOMATIC. Further signals do not change
the operation mode, e.g. the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring remains in the AUTOMATIC
operation mode.
The changeover from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL is carried
out via a pulse or a continuous signal to input E6 (b12/z12) (see
page 26). Further signals do not change the operation mode,
e.g. the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
remains in the MANUAL operation mode.

REG - D Operating Manual

121

REG - D
7.14.4

Tap-changing

F4

OFF
OFF is selected if no signals are available for displaying the
tap-changer position.
Two dashes -- appear on the display in Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring mode.
If the software switch for the tap-changes is set to ON, yet
there is no tap-change information available, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring displays tap-change
0. Such a display could cause operating personnel to come to
wrong conclusions.
ON
If BCD-coded signals are available for displaying the tapchanger position, please select the ON position.
In the regulator mode, the display shows the tap-changer
position.
Note

If an error occurs (BCD signals are available and the tapchanger parameter is set to ON), please check the
connections and the selected input assignment.
Please also observe that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring automatically checks the correctness
of the tap-changer position.
However, the tap-changer must be turned on.
The error message TapErr is displayed to indicate incorrect
tap-changer settings.
TapErr is activated if an illogical tap-change is signalled.
TapErr is only intended to be informative, since the correct
display of tap-changes is not essential for the regulation of
individual transformers.

122

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
However, it the TapErr signal is linked to a relay which has set
the Relay to the manual mode, regulation could be interrupted
when a tap error is detected.
Further information can be found on page 181 and page 283.

7.14.5

Self-Conduction of the operation mode

F5

WITH
WITH stores the operation mode of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring in the event that the auxiliary
voltage fails. This means that after the voltage returns, the Relay
will be reset to AUTOMATIC if it was in AUTOMATIC
operation mode before the voltage failure and will be reset to
MANUAL if it was previously in MANUAL operation mode.
WITHOUT
WITHOUT does not store the operation mode if the auxiliary
voltage fails. This means that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will always be in the MANUAL
operation mode after the voltage returns.

7.14.6

Current Display (of the Transformer)

F2

REG - D Operating Manual

123

REG - D
ON
In the ON setting, the current can also be displayed in the
Relay display (compact display).

OFF
In order to prevent 0.000 A from being displayed for a faulty
current connection, the current display can be surpressed.

7.14.7

LCD saver (display)

F3

On
The display turns off one hour after the keypad was last used.
However, the background illumination turns off approximately
15 minutes after the keypad was last used.

OFF
The screen always remains on; only the background
illumination turns off approximately 15 minutes after the keypad
was last used.

7.14.8

Regulator mode: large display

F4

124

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
OFF
The option of choosing the detailed view will be offered on the
display.

ON
Compared to the detailed display, the large display only shows
the current voltage and tap-changer position.
Note

The F1 key can be used to switch between the normal


and the large display size when in regulator mode.

F1

7.14.9

Language selection

F5

REG - D Operating Manual

125

REG - D
7.14.10 Parallel Program Activation

F2

The parallel program can be activated either by selecting ON


from the menu or via a binary signal.
Selecting LEVEL ensures that the parallel program remains
activated as long as the signal level is sent to the selected input.
PULSE switches the activation ON and OFF.
The type of parallel program activation described in this section
is the simplest type of activation. However, this can often not
meet the requirements of actual use. For this reason, we
request that you primarily refer to the information in Chapter 9.

7.14.11 Up/down relay on time

F2

If the Relay outputs a tap-changing signal, the standard switchon time of the tap-changing pulse is 2s.
Older motor drives in particular often need a longer switch-on
time.
This menu item can be used to set the switch-on time for higher
and lower pulses from 0.5 s to 6 s in increments of 0.1 s.

126

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.14.12 AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error

F3

If an E-LAN error is detected by the Relay for Voltage Control &


Transformer Monitoring when, for example, running in parallel
with multiple transformers, the respective Relay changes from
AUTOMATIC to MANUAL. The AUTO lock in event
of ELAN error function ensures that it is only possible to
change back to AUTOMATIC when the error has been
rectified or when the AUTO lock in event of ELAN error is
switched from ON to OFF.

7.14.13 Setpoint adjustment

F4

The setpoint value is normally entered via the menu.


If the setpoint value has to be changed for operational reasons,
it is possible to increase or decrease it using the left

(lower)

or right
(raise) arrow keys, without having to use the more
lengthy corresponding SETUP method.
The percent values set in menu Add-On 3 determine the size of
the increment/decrement of the setpoint value.
Example:
If 0.5% is set, the setpoint value will be increased or decreased
by 0.5% each time one of the arrow keys is pressed.

REG - D Operating Manual

127

REG - D
7.14.14 Creeping net breakdown
For background information on Creeping Net Breakdown,
please see page 242.
Firmware versions 2.04 and above can derive the creeping net
breakdown from the overvoltage.
However, this function can only be achieved if the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is equipped with two
voltage transformers (feature M+)
The voltage input on the undervoltage side takes care of the
load-dependent regulation, whilst the voltage input on the
overvoltage side serves the creeping net breakdown function.
Recognition

F2

Lock Time

F3

128

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Time Slice

F4

Number of Changes

F5

7.14.15 Limit base (reference value)


For background information on the limit base, please see
page 239.

F2

REG - D Operating Manual

129

REG - D
7.14.16 Setting the Relay to inhibit low if <I or >I
For background information on setting inhibit low when <I or
>I, please refer to overcurrent on page 239.

F3

7.14.17 Maximum tap difference (monitoring)


A maximum tap-change difference may be set for the Isin
and the Isin(S) parallel programs.
An alarm can be output during parallel switching if the
difference between the transformer tap-change levels exceeds
the entered maximum value. The parallel-operating group will
change to MANUAL.
Please connect the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring so that an optical display of the situation is possible
if too large a tap difference occurs.
For this purpose you can either assign the ParErr function to
one of the freely-programmable LEDs or activate a plain text
message on the Relay screen.
A background program is required for the plain text solution
which can be found in our Toolbox or which can be ordered
from our headquarters at any time.
The LED can be set up via SETUP 5, F5.
Please select the parameter 30: ParErr.

F3

130

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.14.18 PARAGRAMER activation
The Paragramer activation is described in detail in chapter 9.

F5

7.15

Transformer configuration

This menu is used to specify between which external


conductors the measuring voltage, which will be used by the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as the
regulating variable, is to be measured.
For more information on connecting the measuring transformer,
see see Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary
voltage) on page 28.
The transformer ratios of the voltage and current transformers
must be entered under the Knu/Kni menu item if the values on
the undervoltage side of the transformer (voltage and current on
the primary side of the measuring transformer) are to be
measured.

F2

REG - D Operating Manual

131

REG - D
7.15.1

Transformer configuration voltage (conductor


connection)

It is not necessary to hardware-connect the voltage and current


connections to specific positions in the network (e.g. U12 and
L3, etc) in order to operate the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will always measure the correct angle
relationship regardless of between which external conductors
the voltage is measured, and regardless of the line in which the
current is measured, so long as the actual connection is
transmitted to SETUP 5, transformer mounting.
Note

Please observe that when the control voltage is derived


from a phase voltage (e.g. UL1-N) and the selected
connector (UL1) has a high-resistance earth
connection, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring will be offered a voltage which will cause the
Relay to make tap-changes in the direction of a higher
voltage.
This condition must be particularly taken into
consideration when operating a compensated network.
If the Relay is connected to an asymmetrically loaded network
and correct measured values are still needed for both the active
and the reactive power, the Relay may also be operated in the
Aron circuit (feature M2).
In order to do so, both the parameterisation (transformer
mounting, voltage and current set to ARON) and the
connection must be carried out in the correct manner.
Please refer to the configuration documents for the connection
assignment for currents l1 and l3 and for voltages L1, L2 and
L3.
It is not sensible to give detailed information about the
connecting the current and voltage supplies at this point since
there is no fixed type of REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring.

132

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The following is valid for the Aron circuit:
(A), (R), L1
(B), (S), L2
(C), (T), L3
U

REG-D

(A), (R), L1
(B), (S), L2
(C), (T), L3
U

REG-D
Note

Only one three-phase voltage is used, even when the


Relay is measuring in an Aron circuit.

F1

REG - D Operating Manual

133

REG - D
7.15.2

Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage

F2

The transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage transformer


must be entered if the primary voltage value is to be displayed.
Example: 20 KV/100 V Knu = 200

7.15.3

Transformer mounting current (conductor connection)

F3

134

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.15.4

Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A)

F4

Caution!

The jumper must be placed onto the correct part of


terminal block 4 (NTZ 2) before changing the current
range.

The contamination of the low voltage networks by harmonics


also affects the medium voltage side and places more
demands on the Relays measuring technology.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring input is
equipped with a 4-pole blocking filter to prevent feedback
effects (aliasing).
The switching of the Single Inline Filters (SILs)
are switched from 1 A to 5 A using the jumper.
The jumpers will be placed in the appropriate positions before
leaving the factory if the nominal value of the current is specified
at the time of ordering.
If the nominal value of the current changes or is unknown at the
time of ordering the hardware and software must be adjusted
to each other. The software adjustment is described in section
7.15.4, and the hardware adjustment is illustrated in the
following two diagrams.

REG - D Operating Manual

135

REG - D

Current

Analogue module (Option)

173.5

Partial assignment for featur M1

Assignment
With jumper Without jumper

Assignment for featur M2

Please note that no jumper is required for a nominal current of


1 A. If the nominal current is 5 A, we recommended placing the
jumper on only one pin.

The jumper must be placed at the position indicated above if


the nominal current is 5 A.
The number of current transformers is controlled via feature M
(M for Messumformung = transducer).
Feature M1 refers to a Relay with one voltage and one current
transformer.

136

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
In this case the Relay is equipped with only one SIL and is only
suitable for measuring symmetrically loaded three-phase
current networks.
Feature M2 refers to a Relay that is equipped with two voltage
and two current transformers.
With this hardware configuration, the Relay can measure using
an Aron circuit and can also be used in three-phase current
networks loaded according to the requirements of the user.
Always ensure (also in the case of M2) that the control voltage
is only measured at the connections that are associated with a
feature M1 voltage converter (see also the information on page
133).

7.15.5

Transformer mounting ratio for the current

F5

The transformer mounting ratio (Kni) of the current transformer


must be entered if the primary current value is to be displayed.
Example: 1000 A/100 A Kni = 1000

REG - D Operating Manual

137

REG - D
7.16

Input assignments (binary inputs)

F3

F3

A specific function can be assigned to each input channel from


the list of selection options.
Example:
If the running time of the tap-changer is to be monitored, the
tap-change in operation lamp must be connected to an input
(e.g. to input E1, as is the case on delivery).
Select TC in operation using the arrow keys and confirm by
pressing Return. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring interprets the signal at E1 as a tap-change in
operation signal and compares it to the maximum time TC in
operation setting in Add-On 1. Also see chapter 7.17.
If the required function is missing, the input must be set to
Prog. The input value can then be connected according to
the respective requirements via the background program.
In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our
website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply
contact our headquarters.

138

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.17

Relay assignments

F4

Relays Rel 3 ... Rel 5 are available to be freely programmed.


Outputs Rel 6 ... Rel 9 are also freely programmable.
The assignment of relay positions Rel 6 to Rel 9 is controlled
using feature N.
N0 No assignment
N1 Assignment with semi-conductor relay
(50 V nominal insulation voltage)
N2 Assignment with relay (250 V)
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
equipped with a Local/Remote key (feature Y1), the assignment
is always the same as that of feature N2 (there are at least 4
additional relays available).

REG - D Operating Manual

139

REG - D
A specific function can be assigned to each output from the list
of selection options.
Example:
If a message is to be sent when the running time of the tapchanger is exceeded, assign the function TC-F or TC-F+ to
a freely programmable relay.
If the tap-changer in operation voltage at input E1 is applied
longer than was specified in Add-On 1, relay R3 will be
activated which can function as an indicator or actuator (motor
protection switch-off).
If the required function is missing, the output must be set to
Prog. The relay can then be connected and activated
according to the respective requirements via the background
program.
In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our
website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply
contact our headquarters.

140

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
7.18

LED assignments

F5

R E G

LEDs

- D

Status
5
6
7
1
2
3
4

A U T O

F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5

lo c a l
re m o te

E S C

M E N U

C O M 1

LEDs 1 ... 7 are available to be freely programmed.


REG - D Operating Manual

141

REG - D
A specific display function may be assigned to each LED from
the list of selection options.
If the exceeded running time is to be signalled on LED 1, assign
the function TC-F to the freely programmable LED 1.
If the actual running time exceeds the specified running time,
LED 1 will be activated.
If the required function is missing, the LED must be set to
Prog. The input value can then be connected according to
the respective requirements via the background program.
In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our
website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply
contact our headquarters.

142

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
8

Measurement Value Simulation

In order to avoid the simulator being switched on accidentally,


some steps are required to guarantee that the simulated
voltage is only applied when it is specifically desired.
The required steps are:
1

Start WinREG

Load the terminal.

After pressing Enter, the device will respond by giving the


respective address, e.g. <A>.

In step 4 you can choose between the following options:

a)

Characteristic simmode=1
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected
via SETUP 6, F5.
In this mode, the simulator can only operate in the
MANUAL operation mode.
Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC switches off the
simulator.

b)

Characteristic simmode=2
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected
via SETUP 6, F5.
In this mode, the simulator can also operate in the
AUTOMATIC operation mode.
Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC does not switch
off the simulator, but it does automatically change back 15
minutes after the keyboard was last used.

c)

Characteristic simmode=0
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
switches off the simulator.
The simulator can no longer be switched on in SETUP 6,
F5.

The simulator mode (simmode=1) is activated as factory


default, which only permits simulator operation in the MANUAL
operation mode. (simmode=1)

REG - D Operating Manual

143

REG - D
Note

If the term Actual Value is displayed in capital


letters as ACTUAL VALUE, the MEASUREMENT
VALUE SIMULATION is active!

The simulator for the quantities U, I, and can be activated in


the SETUP 6/STATUS menu.

F5

F5

Caution!

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


will automatically switch back from the
MEASUREMENT VALUE SIMULATION to normal
regulation 15 min. after the keyboard was last used!

Note

If the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer


Monitoring is operated together with the PAN-D voltage
monitoring unit (connected via E-LAN), it should be
observed that in simulation mode the simulated voltage
will also be fed to the PAN-D. During simulation, the
PAN-D only sees the simulated input voltage and not
the real voltage of the system.

144

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
8.1

Setting the simulated voltage

When the simulator is turned on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2),


the voltage can be simulated in regulator, transducer and
recorder mode using the two arrow keys

and

The phase angle and the current can only be simulated in


transducer mode.

Select F2

F2

TRANSDUCER MODE

The right arrow key

raises the simulated voltage in 0.5 V


increments (when Knu=1).

The left arrow key

lowers the simulated voltage in 0.5 V


increments (when Knu=1).

8.2

Setting the simulated current

Select F2

F2

TRANSDUCER MODE

F2

F2

increases the simulated current incrementally.

F3

F3

decreases the simulated current incrementally.

8.3

Setting the simulated phase angle

Select F2
F4

F4

F5

F5

F2

TRANSDUCER MODE

increases the simulated current


in increments of 1.0 .
increases the simulated current
in increments of 1.0 .

REG - D Operating Manual

145

REG - D
8.4

Setting the simulated tap-change

The tap-change voltage can be simulated when the simulator is


switched on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2).
Start the simulated tap-change by pressing F4

F4

The simulated tap-change is indicated by ++ after the word


measurement simulation.

F4

++ Tap-change simulation is turned on


Note

The simulated tap-change position can only be


changed if the Relay is set to the MANUAL
OPERATION MODE
.

Arrow key raise

increases the simulated tap-changer


position by 1 increment.

Arrow key lower

reduces the simulated tap change by

1 increment.

146

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
9

Parallel Operation of Transformers


with REG-D

Parallel switching of several transformers must be prepared in


advance. In general, the taps must first be adjusted to each
other and the circuit breakers and disconnectors have to be put
in the corresponding position. Then, all of the Relays switched
in parallel must be informed of these switching statuses.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
is provided with a program section which is capable of
recognizing the switching statuses of the individual
transformers and can automatically group the transformers
according to these switching statuses so that only those Relays
feeding on one joint busbar work in parallel.
It is, of course, also possible to work in the standard way in
which the parallel-switching operation is manually activated.
Both procedures require specific preparations to be carried out
on the device in advance. The preparations to be carried out are
described in the following sections:

Preparing manual activation


Preparing automatic activation

The regulation conditions should be set before choosing the


regulating procedure.
Are the transformers of the same or of a different type? Is it
possible to connect the individual Relays with each other via
E-LAN, or is the distance between each feeding point too
large making connection impossible?
Should the transformers be regulated so that they all have
the same tap-changer position or should the reactive
circulating current be minimised?
Please select the appropriate procedure from the list below
according to the answers to these questions:

REG - D Operating Manual

147

REG - D
All the listed regulating procedures are available in the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as standard.
Master-Slave
Master-Slave independent (MSI)
I sin (minimisation of the reactive circulating current)
I sin (S) (minimisation of the reactive circulating current,
taking into consideration the nominal powers of the
transformers)
cos
The cos operation is an available regulation procedure
which is always used if the Relays which are switched in parallel
cannot be connected to each other via the bus (E-LAN).
If a bus error occurs during parallel operation according to the
reactive circulating current minimisation procedure (I sin or
I sin (S)), the complete combination switches to an
emergency regulation which also works according to the cos
procedure.
If a malfunction occurs, each Relay uses the last measured cos
and attempts to both maintain the voltage within the
regulative deviation (bandwidth) and to approach the last
measured cos as closely as possible.
Pre-requisites regarding the REG-DTM
REG-DA
Relay
Programs

Operation Transformer boundary conditions


mode

Parallel
operation
on the
busbar

Nominal
power

no change

no change
or various

10 %

none

possible

required

required

Master
Slave/MSI

no change or
no change
various

10 %

parameterisable

required

possible

required

Isin

no change or
various

10 %

parameterisable

required

possible

required

Isin (S)

no change or
various

parameterisable

required

possible

possible

cos

various

Parallel
no change or no change
operation on a
various
or various
network

148

Deviation
Maximum tapCurrent
TapBus
of the relative
change
measurement changing connection
short circuit difference when
available
possible available
voltages
in operation

Voltage
change per
tap-change

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Connection diagram

* see next page

REG-D

REG-D

9.1

REG - D Operating Manual

149

REG - D
The circuit diagram shows the parallel switching of two
transformers with the most important connections. The
principle is the same for three transformers and more.
Please observe that the voltage and current transformers do
not have to be connected in the shown manner. Every possible
type of connection of the individual conductors is possible.
However, it is important to ensure that the transformer
configuration or switching status for carrying out
measurements has been entered in SETUP 5, F2.
*

Please observe the contact load at R1 and R2!

110 V DC

230 V AC

20 A Switch on

5 A @ cos = 1

5 A Hold

3 A @ cos = 0.4

0.4 A Switch off

150

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
9.2

Programs for parallel operation and their


prerequisites

Caution!

Please note without fail that only REG-D Relays for


Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with the
same firmware version can be operated in parallel.
Otherwise errors can occur during operation.
The current firmware version can be displayed using the
Relays keypad.
Please press the menu key until you have
reached SETUP 6. The Relay status page can be
selected using F5.
The firmware version is displayed in the first two lines,
e.g. V2.01 on 01.02.04.
If different versions are installed, please download the
current firmware version from our website (www.aeberle.de or www.regsys.de) or telephone us.

9.2.1

Preparation

The following description defines both the preparations to be


carried out for manual activation as well as those necessary for
automatic activation of parallel switching.
For demonstrating each individual operating step, a system has
been selected which consists of three transformers feeding on
one busbar.
The master-slave procedure has been chosen as the parallel
program.
If another program with a different number of transformers is
selected, please adapt each operating step correspondingly.
In order to permit the master to check at any time whether the
slaves are working correctly, it is necessary that each Relay is
supplied with the tap-change position of its transformer and
that the bus connection (E-LAN) is activated between all the
Relays.

Preparing manual activation


Preparing manual activation refers to the sequence of
consecutive switching operations which prepare for the parallel
operation of several transformers (adjusting the tap-change
REG - D Operating Manual

151

REG - D
position, adding circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings)
as well as the actual manual activation of the parallel regulation.
In this case parallel regulation can be activated via the menu
(SETUP 5, Add-On 6) or via a binary input signal.

Preparing for automatic activation


Preparing automatic activation refers to the simultaneous and
automatic activation of the parallel operation of several
transformers as a function of the logical position (off/on) of all of
the circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings.
This type of preparation can be carried out by feeding a busbar
replica (positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties
and bus couplings) to each one of the Relays involved in the
regulation.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the regulation system
can automatically recognise which transformer is supposed to
work with which other transformer(s) on one busbar in parallel
operation.
The transformers are then regulated according to the selected
regulating procedure.

152

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
9.2.2

Preparing manual activation

The following steps are required to set up the parallel-switching


of 3 transformers according to the master-slave procedure.
If two transformers or even four transformers are required,
please adapt the procedure correspondingly.
Note

In this chapter parameterisation will be carried out using


the membrane keypad of the Relay.
Of course, the individual operation steps may also be
performed using the WinREG parameterisation
software.
Step 1
Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.

Step 2
Assign station identification.
The Relay assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code
(address) <A>, the Relay assigned to transformer 2 is given the
station code (address) <B>, and the Relay assigned to
transformer 3 is given the station code <C>.
Code input:
Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.
A to Z4
F2

This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or


decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.
Confirm your selection using <Enter>.

REG - D Operating Manual

153

REG - D
Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each
station code may only be assigned once.
If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a Relay, the
Relay will automatically assign a code to its corresponding
PAN-D.
To assign this address, the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!)
and assigns it to the PAN-D.
Example:
If the Relay has the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1> to
the PAN-D. If the Relay has the code <B9>, it will assign the
code <C> to the PAN-D.

Step 3
Establish the connection to the bus.
To start the parallel operation, all participating Relays must be
able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.
This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus)
is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.
Once the hardware prerequisites are fulfilled, the bus link must
be parameterised [see E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)
on page 96].

Step 4
Parallel program selection
Select SETUP 1, F5.

F5

154

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation
procedure.

F2

This setting is only required for the master which usually has
the address <A> because all of the other stations will
automatically be declared as slaves when the group list is input
(see Step 5).
Slaves are to be assigned the parallel program none''.

Step 5
Input the group list
The codes of all of the Relays participating in the parallel
operation are listed in the group list.
Select SETUP 1, F5, F1, F5

F5

Please press F1, F2 and F3 to parameterise the Relays in the


first, second and third positions with the codes <A>, <B> and
<C> respectively.
If the group list can be entered in the manner described, then
as a rule it can generally be guaranteed that the bus link will
work properly.

REG - D Operating Manual

155

REG - D
It is not necessary to input a regulative influence for the selected
procedure.

Step 6
Parallel switching activation
There are several different ways to activate the parallelswitching operation:

Activation via the keypad


Activation via the binary input (level-controlled)
Activation via binary input (pulse-controlled)
Activation via IEC ..., RS 232, ...

Activation via the keypad


Please select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6
Pressing down the F2 function key activates the parallelswitching operation.

F2

Select ON.
The parallel-switching operation is active in automatic mode as
long as the parallel program activation is ON.
If you prefer to activate the parallel-switching operation via a
binary input instead of via the menu, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring offers two options:
The parallel-switching operation can either be level-controlled
or activated via a level-controlled input.

156

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Level-controlled activation means that the parallel-switching
operation is activated as long as the potential is at the selected
input. It will be switched off as soon as the potential at the
selected input drops off.
In pulse-controlled activation, the parallel-switching operation
is switched on by the first pulse. The next pulse switches it off
and so on.
If the parallel-switching operation is to be deactivated using a
binary input, please carry out the following procedure:
Select the trigger input.
All freely programmable inputs with the exception of E5 and E6
may be used as the trigger or release input.
The following example demonstrates how to activate the
parallel-switching operation via input E7.
Select SETUP 5, F3, F1

F4

Press the F4 key and then select the Par Prog function in the
framed field in the middle of the display.
Accept the setting by pressing <Enter>.
The parallel-switching operation can now be activated via
binary input E7.

REG - D Operating Manual

157

REG - D
For an optical signal that the parallel-switching operation has
been activated, please select SETUP5, F5.

F5

In the following example, the status parallel switching


activated is to be indicated using the freely programmable LED
4.
Press the F5 key and select the Par Prog function in the
framed field in the middle of the display.

F5

Accept the setting for LED 4 by pressing <Enter>.


If the status of the parallel-switching operation (ON/OFF) is to
be reported via a potential-free contact, please select a free
relay (R3, R4, R5, ...) in SETUP 5 using the F4 key and assign
the Par-Prog function to it.

158

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
If the parallel-switching operation is to be activated or
deactivated via level-controlled or pulse-controlled inputs,
please select the preferred activation method (level or pulse) in
SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6 using the F2 key.

Step 7
Switch the circuit breakers, bus ties, bus couplings and
disconnectors according to the planned parallel-switching
operation.

Step 8
Switch all of the Relays to the AUTO mode.
The master first sets all of the slaves to its actual tap-changer
position in order to start the voltage regulation.
In normal operation, the voltage is held within the permissible
regulative deviation (bandwidth) and all transformers involved
are regulated to the same tap-changer position.

REG - D Operating Manual

159

REG - D
9.2.3

Preparing automatic activation

The PARAGRAMER can be loaded from the start menu as a


tool for preparing the automatic activation and for visualising the
switching status on-line.
The artificial word PARAGRAMER is derived from the terms
parallel and one-line diagram.
The PARAGRAMER displays the switching status of the
individual transformers in a one-line diagram and can be loaded
from the start menu using the F5 key, provided that the
PARAGRAMER feature has been activated.
Normally up to six transformers can be operated using the
PARAGRAMER.
In a special version, however, up to 10 transformers can be
connected.
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) of
its transformer into each Relay.
The regulation system can automatically recognise which
transformer is to work with which other transformer(s) on a
busbar in parallel operation on the basis of the switching
statuses.
The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one
single busbar.
The standard PARAGRAMER version can display the following
configurations

2 transformers with one busbar


(1 circuit breaker per transformer)
Note
= Switching element
open

= Switching element
closed

160

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
3 transformers with one busbar
(1 circuit breaker per transformer)

2 transformers with two busbars


(1 circuit breaker and 2 disconnectors per transformer)

3 transformers with two busbars


(1 circuit breaker and 2 disconnectors per transformer)

REG - D Operating Manual

161

REG - D
Busbars 1 and 2 can additionally be disconnected or
coupled by means of bus ties or bus couplings.
The logical status of the couplings may also be fed to the Relay
and is included in the assignment algorithm (who with whom?).

The following abbreviations have been selected to clearly


characterise each individual switch, disconnector, etc.:
The prefix PG stands for PARAGRAMER. All of the other
abbreviated terms are listed below:

PG_LS:
Circuit breaker return signal (German: Leistungsschalter) of
the corresponding transformer

PG_TRa:
Disconnector return signal (German: Trenner) of the
corresponding transformer to busbar 1

PG_TRb:
Disconnector return signal (German: Trenner) of the
corresponding transformer to busbar 2

PG_QK:
Bus coupling return signal (German: Querkupplung) of the
corresponding transformer

PG_LK1:
Bus tie return signal right (German: Lngskupplung rechts)
of the corresponding transformer in busbar 1

PG_LK2:
Bus tie return signal right (German: Lngskupplung rechts)
of the corresponding transformer in busbar 2

162

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Step 1
Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.

Step 2
Activate the PARAGRAMER.
Please select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6, F5 and activate the
PARAGRAMER by selecting the number of parallel-operating
transformers.
For three parallel-operating transformers select: ON-3

F5

Step 3
Assign station identification.
The Relay assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code
(address) <A>, the Relay assigned to transformer 2 is given the
station code (address) <B>, and the Relay assigned to
transformer 3 is given the station code <C>.
Code input:
Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.
A to Z4
F2

REG - D Operating Manual

163

REG - D
This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or
decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.
Confirm your selection using <Enter>.
Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each
station code may only be assigned once.
If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the Relay will
automatically assign a code to its corresponding PAN-D.
To assign this address, the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!)
and assigns it to the PAN-D.

Example:
If the regulator has the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1>
to the PAN-D. If the Relay has the code <B5>, it will assign the
code <B6> to the PAN-D.

Step 4
Establish the connection to the bus.
To start the parallel operation, all parallel-operating Relays must
be able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.
This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus)
is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.
The bus link must be parameterised [see E-LAN (Energy-Local
Area Network) on page 96] once the hardware prerequisites
are fulfilled.

Step 5
Parameterisation of the group list.
The number of participating parallel-operating transformers
(n=3) is specified by inputting the group list.
The group list is numbered consecutively and each Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be

164

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
parameterised in the same order. The Relay of the first
transformer must be first in the group list, the Relay of the
second transformer second in the group list, etc. The Relay ID
may be freely selected as described above. For clarity,
however, the first Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should be assigned code A:, Relay 2 code B:, etc.
The group list also specifies the number of transformers shown
in the PARAGRAMER mode (second position in the group list
occupied => 2 transformers, third position occupied => 3
transformers, etc.).
The group list also indicates which Relays are presently working
together:
Three symbols (+,*,=), which appear before the group list entry
have been introduced to characterise the parallel-operating
transformers. Relays with the same symbol are presently
feeding on one busbar.
The following procedure should be carried out for each Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring:
Setup 1, =>
<F5> Programs, =>
<F1> Par. Parameters, =>
<F5> E-LAN group list, => Enter the stations

Step 6
Parallel program selection
Select SETUP 1, F5.

F5

REG - D Operating Manual

165

REG - D
After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation
procedure.

F2

This setting is only required for the master which usually has
the address <A> because all of the other stations will
automatically be declared as slaves when the group list is input.
Slaves should be assigned the parallel program none''.

Step 7
Input assignments
The individual programmable binary Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring inputs are prepared for their respective
tasks in this step.
If, for instance, the disconnector PG_TR1 of transformer 1 is to
be assigned to the Relay input E8, the function PG_TR1 must
be assigned to input E 8 using menu SETUP 5, F3 Input
assignments... and the function keys.
This same procedure applies for all of the other inputs/signals
as well.

166

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Depending on the input assignment, the display can show one
or two busbars.
The following input functions are available:

PG_LS:
Circuit breaker return signal of the corresponding
transformer

PG_TR1:
Disconnector return signal of the corresponding
transformer on busbar 1

PG_TR2:
Disconnector return signal of the corresponding
transformer on busbar 2

PG_QK:
Bus coupling

PG_LK1:
Bus tie to the right of the infeed on
busbar 1

PG_LK2:
Bus tie to the right of the infeed on
busbar 2
Inputs which are not in use are assigned a default setting. This
makes it possible to also display system diagrams which do not
correspond to the maximum possible configuration with one
circuit breaker, two disconnectors, one bus coupling and two
bus ties per transformer.
Note

A solution is also available for applications in which the


busbars are coupled crosswise.
The crosslink feature makes it easy to master this task.
This type of busbar arrangement is not described here
since it is not used very frequently. If it is required,
please contact our headquarters. This option is already
available on your Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring and can be activated at any
time using the Firmware feature.

REG - D Operating Manual

167

REG - D
Summary of the default settings:

1 busbar:
PG_LS:

open

PG_TR1:

closed, however not displayed in the


PARAGRAMER

2 busbars:
PG_LS:

closed

PG_TR1:

open

PG_TR2:

open

PG_QK:

open

PG_LK1:

closed

PG_LK2:

closed

The displays to be shown are changed according to the criteria


listed below:

If the Relay in the third position in the group list is assigned


a freely selected PG_xxx parameter, three transformers will
be displayed in a circuit diagram instead of two.

If either PG_TR1 or PG_TR2 is used on a Relay entered in


the group, two busbars will be displayed in a circuit diagram
instead of one.

If either PG_QK, PG_LK1 or PG_LK2 is used on a Relay


entered in the group, the bus ties and bus couplings will be
activated in the display.

168

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Step 8
Displaying the busbar replica
Depending on the parameterised group list, the overview
screen will display two to six Relays. In addition to the
PARAGRAMER overview, it is also possible to select a detailed
display.
Selection summary:
<MENU>, <F5> => PARAGRAMER summary
Selecting the switching status:
Use <F5> to switch switching status/overview.
Use < and > to scroll in the Switching status view.

9. Step
Switch all of the Relays to the AUTO operation mode.
The parallel-switching operation can now be activated
automatically.

REG - D Operating Manual

169

REG - D
9.3

Parallel operation using the Master-SlaveIndependent (MSI) procedure

(available as of Version 2.03 from the 16th July 2004)


Note

All of the control technology information about TapErr


and ParErr also applies to the master-slave operation
carried out according to any activation procedure.
MSI stands for Master (M), Slave (S) and Independent (I)
operation of individual transformers.
In this operation mode, all of the participating parallel-switching
transformers are placed by the operator in one of the states
described above.
Transformers then always work according to the principle of
equalising the tap-changer positions, which is also called the
master-slave procedure.
Note

The terms master-follower and master-slave are used


synonymously is everyday language and that is also the
case in the following text.
Please note:

In the MSI mode, it is only possible to change the operation


mode (MSI) of the Relay when in the manual mode.

In the independent mode, on the other hand, each Relay for


Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be switched
back and forth from MANUAL to AUTO at any time.

When the transformers are already operating in parallel, it is


possible to switch from the AUTO mode to the MANUAL
mode by switching any Relay to the MANUAL mode.
This therefore ensures that the entire group can quickly be
switched to the MANUAL mode in the event of a fault.

In the Auto mode, the group can only then be switched if the
master is switched to the AUTO mode; the slaves will not
accept being switched from MANUAL to AUTO.

The status line of the paragramer display indicates which


Relay is currently functioning as the master.

170

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
It is also possible to indicate the operating status using an LED.
If the parameter MSI-Ma is assigned to a particular LED, it lights
up when the Relay is operating in master mode. The same
procedure can also be carried out for slave operation
(parameter = MSI_Sl) or independent operation (parameter =
MSI_Ind).
The parameterisation is also displayed in the ParaGramer and
the individual transformers are designated by the letters M, S
and I.
All of the transformers/Relays working as either a master or a
slave are displayed with a closed coupling. On the other hand,
Relays working in the independent mode (currently feeding on
a different busbar or in the stand-by mode) are displayed with
an open coupling.

If more than one Relay has been mistakenly assigned to the


master mode, the MSI algorithm will treat the Relay with the
lowest address (A is lower than B or C!) as the master and will
treat all of the other Relays mistakenly defined as being masters
as slaves.
The ParaGramer display will also show the present status of the
parallel operation in the status line in the form of the measured
voltage, the calculated regulative deviation and the tap-changer
position in addition to the Who with whom? information
This makes it possible to obtain all of the information needed to
evaluate the parallel operation.

REG - D Operating Manual

171

REG - D
Conditions for MSI operation
The MSI operation mode can only be applied when the
PARAGRAMER feature is activated and turned on.
Relays which are delivered with the K1 feature (with parallel
operation) are already parameterised in this way by default.
The Paragramer is switched on by selecting SETUP 5, Add-On
6.
Press F5 to specify the number of transformers to be switched
in parallel.

Example:
The ParaGramer must be set to ON-3 for a group of three
transformers.
The MSI operation mode can be selected by choosing the MSI
operation mode in SETUP 1, Programs..., Parallel Program.
Caution!

The MSI operation mode must be selected for each


Relay involved in the parallel-switching operation.

We advise contacting our company headquarters if the K1


feature and, therefore, also the Paragramer, are to be enabled
at a later date.
To verify the present settings, please select
SETUP 6, F5 (Status), --> Page 2 of the device status.

Note

Several features, e.g. RECORDER, TMM 01 can, of


course, be loaded at the same time.

172

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Further prerequisites for using the MSI procedure:
Only transformer types with identical electrical (output, short
circuit voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions,
switching groups, etc.) and mechanical features (number of
tap-changer positions, position of the deadband) are suitable
for MSI operation.
A different procedure should be used if one or more of the
parameters differ.
In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay receives the
information regarding the tap-changer position of its
transformer.
For operation using the master-slave tap-change equalisation
procedure, it is mandatory that the correct tap-changer position
is recorded and transmitted to the respective Relays.
Every potential candidate must be listed in the group list with
its address in order to notify the system of the number of
Relays/transformers that should take part in the parallel
operation.
Please select the sub-menu Parallel Parameters in
SETUP 1.
Method:
SETUP 1 / Programs... (F5) / Par. Parameters (F1)
The group list must be entered in the Par. parameters menu.
In the first group position, please select the Relay with the
lowest address by pressing the F1 key. Then place the Relay
with the next highest address in the second position in the list.
Continue in the same manner for all of the Relays currently
involved in the parallel-switching operation as well as for those
that will be later in the parallel switching operation later.

REG - D Operating Manual

173

REG - D
Selecting the operation modes
Three different methods can be used to select operation
modes.
1.

via the binary input

2.

via the membrane keypad (F3 F5)

3.

via the (serial) control system

Method 1:
Select three free inputs per Relay and assign the Master
(MSI_Ma), Slave (MSI_Sl) or Independent (MSI_Ind) functions to
them using SETUP 5, F3 or by using WinREG.

Example:
IT should be possible to select the operation mode using inputs
E9 to E11.
The following is displayed in SETUP 5, F3:

A signal transmitted to input E-9 will cause the Relay to work as


the master.
The present status is indicated by an X in the square brackets.
The results of this parameterisation:

174

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
This status is indicated on both the regulator display as well as
on the ParaGramer.

REG - D Operating Manual

175

REG - D
Method 2:
Selection via the membrane keypad is only possible in the
ParaGramer.
For this reason it is necessary to first return to the main menu.

Then press the F5 key to select the ParaGramer display mode.

The symbol

in the status line has been assigned to the F1 key.

Press F1 and select the desired operation mode using F3, F4


and F5.
Information regarding effective manoeuvring on the screen can
be found under i by pressing the F2 key.
Note

The mode cannot be overwrittten via the keypad if a


specific mode is pre-selected via the binary input and a
signal is present at the input.
The mode that was most recently assigned an input is
always pre-selected. Since the inputs are triggered via
the edge of the input signal, one short impulse is
sufficient to select the operation mode.

176

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Method 3:
Selection of the individual Relays is carried out via a serial
interface (IEC, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, SPA-Bus; via LWL or
copper).
A further prerequisite for fault-free operation is that all of the
Relays have the same parameterisation.
For this reason, different parameters must be set in SETUPs 1
and 5.
Since the slaves in the master-slaves procedure are only
allowed a limited freedom of action, changes in the parameters
can only be carried out in the independent mode or the master
mode.
For this reason, the parameterisation should already have been
completed in SETUP 5 before commencing work in SETUP 1.

Please note:
First SETUP 5, then SETUP 1
Select SETUP 5, F1, (Add-On 6).
The following parameters can be entered:

Explanations of the individual menu items:


Parallel Prog. activation must be set to ON to activate parallel
operation.

REG - D Operating Manual

177

REG - D
The indication 1st ParErr after n tap-changer in operation time
can be interpreted as follows.
If a parallel-switching operation with n stations has just
occurred, the system assumes that all of the participating
transformers will have the same tap-changer position within 1.5
x the tap-changer in operation time.
If there is an error in the transmission of the BCD code or if there
are problems regarding the equalisation of the tap-changer
positions, a tap-changer position error (TapErr) will be detected
which causes the system to stop.
However, if a transformer, which (for example) has been feeding
another busbar or has been working in the stand-by mode, is
selected to participate in the parallel-switching operation, this
parameter can be used to specify the number of tap-changes
it may deviate from the parallel transformers that are already
running.
This transformer is then brought to the same tap-changer
position as the transformers which are already operating in
parallel, one step at a time and without interrupting regulation.
If equalisation doesnt occur within the pre-selected time, the
parallel-switching is stopped and all participating Relays switch
to MANUAL mode.

Example:
The transformer/Relay <D> to be added to the parallelswitching operation is currently set to the resting position in tapchanger position 4.
The group switched in parallel is currently working in tapchanger position 8 and the motor running time between two
tap-changer positions is 7 seconds.
If you want to add transformer <D> to the parallel-switched
group without considering the resulting circulating reactive
currents the 1st ParErr after ntap-changer in operation time
parameter must be set to 4.
The monitoring algorithm of the parallel program will wait an
interval of 4 times the tap-changer in operation time of the
added transformer (4 x 7 seconds = 28 seconds) before a
parallel error (ParErr) is triggered.
Under normal conditions, the new station can be brought to
the tap-changer position of the group within this specified
interval.

178

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
If this is not possible, the error flag ParErr will be set and the
entire group will be switched to the MANUAL mode.
The MANUAL operation mode is the fail-safe position for all of
the master-slave procedures.
The group can only be switched back to the AUTO mode via
the master after the error which triggered the ParErr has been
rectified.
The number of transformers/Relays involved in the parallelswitching operation can be selected with the help of the
ParaGramer Activity parameter.

Example:
If three transformers/Relays are to be switched in parallel,
Paragramer Activity

must be selected by pressing F5.

Settings in SETUP 1
Several settings must be carried out in Setup 1.
Under normal conditions all of the transformers are the same
the settings for the permissible regulative deviation (F1), the
time factor (F2) and the setpoint value (F3) should all be the
same.
However, if you prefer to have different setpoint values
activated when changing masters, different setpoint values can
also be specified.
However, during the parallel-switching operation, only the
setpoint value parameterised in the currently active master is
taken into consideration.
Different setpoint values can naturally also be selected even if
the setpoint values originally had the same parameterisation. To
do this, the setpoint value of the active master is changed via
the binary input, the program or the serial interface.

REG - D Operating Manual

179

REG - D
Select SETUP 1, F5 (Programs).
Select the parallel program MSI using the F2 key.
All of the preparations necessary for the parallel-switching
operation have now been carried out. Proceed in the MANUAL
mode by changing the transformers until the voltage is outside
of the tolerance band. Then switch to AUTO mode to verify
whether the parallel-switching operation is functioning properly.
It is only functioning properly if the voltage returns to the
tolerance band within a short period of time and all of the
transformers are set to the same tap-changer position.
We recommend carrying out this test for both positive and
negative regulative deviations.

180

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
9.3.1

Trouble-shooting

Parallel-switching operations carried out according to the


master-slave procedure can only function properly, if in
addition to the correct functioning of the participating Relays
the infrastructure (recording and signalling of the tap-changer
position, bus connection) are also functioning fault-free.
To ensure that errors that could occur outside of the Relays do
not cause problems for maintaining the voltage, the two error
flags ParErr and TapErr have been introduced to monitor the
recording of the tap-changer position and the bus connection
respectively.

9.3.1.1 Description of the ParErr and TapErr error flags


A fault in the parallel-switching operation is signalled through
the ParErr and TapErr error bits.

ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to
the MANUAL operation mode. If a different behaviour is
desired, this can be specified through an alteration to the
SYSCTR feature. In this case please contact our headquarters.
ParErr is triggered, for example, when the Relay is bypassed
when a tap-changer regulation is carried out (the tap-changer
position is set directly at the motor drive or via the remote
control bypass) and the transformers are not all set back to the
same tap-changer position within an interval that is 1.5 times
the tap-change in operation time.
Exception: If a transformer with a specific tap difference is added
to the parallel-switching operation (independent becomes
slave), ParErr is not triggered until the interval specified in
SETUP 5, Add-On 6, 1st ParErr after ntap-changer in
operation time has been exceeded.

REG - D Operating Manual

181

REG - D
TapErr
TapErr is a signal that indicates a problem with the tap-changer
position. The name is derived from the term tap error.
Like ParErr, TapErr affects the entire group when in MSI
operation mode.
If a transformer is being switched in parallel, regulation will stop
after 1.5 x the tap-changer in operation time if the tap-changer
positions have not reached the same level within this time.
We recommend individually assigning the TapErr and ParErr
error bits to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating
personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus
make it easier to rectify the error.

The following are considered to be tap errors:


1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example:
The Relay outputs a raise command and the transformer
reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a lower
command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been swapped or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the
transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus
lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is expected that an increase in the tap-changer
position results in a higher voltage, and a decrease in the tapchanger position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

182

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
2. No tap-change

Example:
The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position
does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap
position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay
interprets this as a fault in the tap-change operation and the
TapErr flag is set.
As mentioned above, we recommend assigning the TapErr
error bit to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating
personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus
make it easier to rectify any error.
Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
H 7=RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0
H 8=RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0
In place of the Upper tap limitation, enter the required upper tap
limitation for your requirements and in place of the Lower tap
limitation enter the required lower tap limitation.

Note

The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,


and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

REG - D Operating Manual

183

REG - D
10

Resistance Measuring Equipment for


Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded
Tap-Change Signalling

Resistance input
If the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is equipped with a tap-change potentiomenter
resistance input, the tap-changer resistance network can be
connected directly and interpreted as a tap-change by the
Relay.
This eliminates the complication of using an external resistance
measurement transducer.
The resistance chain receives a constant current from the Relay
via two terminals (see design specification).
The voltage drop that occurs with the tap-change level is
measured using two further terminals (see design specification).
The Relay is normally connected in a 3-conductor circuit.
Please contact our company headquarters if a 4-conductor
circuit is required.
The resistance measurement equipment consists of a
programmable current source to feed the measurement
resistor, and a voltage measurement device to measure the
voltage at the resistor. Tap-change resistances between 1
and 400 can be measured. However, the total resistance
must remain 20 k
The measurement result is output with a 12 bit resolution at a
refresh rate of approx. 10 Hz (0.1 s).
The measurement equipment also contains a broken wire
detection system.
The parameters are input in an application menu using the
keypad.
Loading the application menu
The application menu appears when the enter key is pressed in
one of the main menus (regulator measurement transducer,
recorder etc.).
The system also branches off into the application menu if the
enter key is pressed when in SETUP 1 to 6.

184

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Meaning of the lines in the menu
1st Line: dR is the nominal resistance between two levels
2nd Line: is the highest measurable level
3rd Line: is the lowest measurable level

10.1

Error detection

The error detection recognises the following errors:

Interruption in the current loop


Overloading of the current source
Interruption of one or both of the feeder cables for the
voltage measurement input

Measurement input overloaded


Measurement range overshot
The resistance measurement value will be > RMAX for all
detectable faults.
Therefore RMAX should be measured so that the value is never
exceeded under normal conditions.
If an error occurs, an Infobox will be shown, which indicates the
error and the current measured resistance value.

10.2

Level detection

The level resistance value RS is a required input value.


The internal level N is calculated from the measured resistance
value RM using

and displayed.
REG - D Operating Manual

185

REG - D
The present measurement resistance value and the deviation,
Rn, of the present measurement resistance value from the
present level N as a percent of RS (-50% ... 0 ... +50%) is shown
in line 5 of the application menu.
RM
Rn = 100% ------- + 1-N )
RS

10.3

Connection options

The depiction of the two connection options is merely


representative.
Since the tap-change potentiometer can be connected to any
of the three available terminals (see also chapter 13), an exact
assignment to a particular connection point is not possible.

3 3-conductor
- L e i t e r s c h a circuit
ltu n g
S 1

IK
R

4-conductor
4 - L e i t e r s c circuit
h a ltu n g
S 1

S 2

E +

E -

IK
R

L a

IK
-

L b

S 2

U
+

E +

186

L a

x R s
R L

IK
-

L b

R s
b

E -

L a

R s
a

a
L a

, R

L b

2 0 W
R

N
L

x R s
a R

b
L b

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
11

mA inputs, mA outputs

The REG-D and REG-DA Relays differ from one another in


terms of design and the basic configuration of the analogue
inputs and outputs.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
is not provided with any analogue inputs, whereas the REG-DA
Relay is always equipped with one analogue input module.
Both Relays can optionally be upgraded with various additional
modules.
The following modules are available:

Analogue input module with two analogue mA inputs


Analogue module with only one input
(only possible for the RG-DA)

Analogue module with only one output


(only possible for the RG-DA)

Analogue output module with two analogue mA outputs


PT100 module to connect a PT100 directly to a 3conductor circuit

Resistance module as a tap-change potentiometer


(1 ... 400 /tap-change)
(see chapter 10 for description)

The parameterisation of the inputs and outputs is the same for


both types of Relay and can be carried out using either the
keypad or the WinREG parameterisation software.
It is advantageous to carry out the parameterisation using
WinREG, since that is the simplest method to gain an overview
of all the various parameters.
However, parameterisation using the keypad is shown in the
example, since this gives an insight into the multiple possibilities
and is very often required.

REG - D Operating Manual

187

REG - D
11.1

Analogue inputs

The individual steps are explained through the aid of an


example.
Example:
In this example parameterisation is carried out on a REG-DA,
which is equipped with one mA input (Channel 1) as standard.
The tap-change of a transformer is delivered using a mA signal
and is connected to channel 1 of the Relay.
The mA signal between 4 ... 20mA should represent a tapchange range of 1 to 17 tap-change positions.
How to proceed:
Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator,
transducer, etc.), select menu and then select SETUP 6 using
the arrow keys.

Press F1 to select General 1

The submenus which are required for parameterising the


analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.

188

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D

Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the up and


down arrow keys.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA
Relay can only have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.
The entry channel 1 AI/ANA (AI analogue input) and, for
example, channel 3 AO/ANA (AO analogue output) is
created automatically and shows that channel 1 has an
analogue input and that channel 3 is hardware-prepared as an
analogue output.
Select channel 1 (F2)
This is ASETUP 1, in which various characteristics of the input
can be parameterised.

The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.

REG - D Operating Manual

189

REG - D
The following functions are available as standard:
Note

an i at the beginning of a line stands for input!


OFF

Input is turned off

ANA

Input is assigned a specific function using a


background program

iOilTp-TR

Output represents the oil temperature of the


transformer

iOilTp-TR

Output represents the oil temperature of the


tap-changer

iOilL-TR

Output represents the oil level


of the transformer

iOilL-TR

Output represents the oil level


of the tap-changer

iWater

Output represents the water (H20) in the oil.

iGas

Output represents the amount of dissolved


gases in the oil

iTapPos

Tap-change position of the transformer

Note

The quantities OilTp-TR and OilTp-TC must be supplied


using the PT100 module. The oil level, water and gas
measurement quantities can only be handled if they are
available as mA signals from an appropriate sensor.

Select iTapPos using the F2 and F4 arrow keys and then


confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

190

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Choose Pos. for position as the analogue unit
Press F3

The available character sets can be shown by pressing abc


(F1 key).

Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down,
left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.
You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.
F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.
Decimal places are not required in this case since the tap-change
position is a whole-number quantity.

REG - D Operating Manual

191

REG - D
Press F4 and then reduce the number of decimal places to zero
by pressing F4 again.
Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.

The type of characteristic line can be selected under the


parameter selection menu item.
The following settings are possible:
ALL

Only for special applications


related to old software versions.

Fac+Off

Only for special applications


related to old software versions.

P0P2

Linear characteristic line

P0P1P2

Bent characteristic line

P0P2 (linear characteristic line)


A linear characteristic line has two points (beginning and end)
which can be described using the points P0 and P2.
Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y
coordinate.
The characteristic lines are so constructed that mA values
(input or output) are always placed on the y axis in normalised
form.
The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined
by the specific hardware configuration. Therefore a normalised
representation is sensible.
Example:
0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 und Y2 = 1
4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 und Y2 = 1
0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

192

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
y
P2-y

P0-y

P2

P0
P0-x

P2-x

P0P1P2 (bent characteristic line)


Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.
In this case the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as
lying between points P0 and P2.

y
P2-y

P2

P1-y
P0-y

P1
P0
P0-x

REG - D Operating Manual

P1-x

P2-x

193

REG - D
A linear characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.
Select P0P2 using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by
pressing Enter.

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right


arrow key.

The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.
The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined via
coordinate pairs P0-X (output quantity at start of the line), P0-Y
(input quantities at the start of the line)
P2-X (output quantity at the start of the line) and P2-Y (input
quantity at the end of the line).

194

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
y
P2-y (1)

P2

P0-y (0.2)

P0
1
P0-x

17
P2-x

x/tapchange

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right


arrow key.

This SETUP predefines how the analogue input should behave


if the region boundaries are exceeded.
The following choices are available under Limit Handling:
None
High
Low
High+Low

REG - D Operating Manual

195

REG - D
Explanations:
None:
High:

no limiting,
neither upwards nor downwards
Limiting, upwards only
Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay would
display tap-change position 17, even if the
upstream measurement transducer over-

controls
and outputs,for example, 24mA instead of
20mA.
Low:

Limiting, downwards only


Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay would
display tap-change position 1, even if

upstream
measurement transducer outputs only 0mA
instead of 4mA.
Recommendation:
In the case of inputs 4 ... 20mA, the lower limit
should not be activated, otherwise important
information may be lost.
If the input signal value falls below 4 mA, the
display remains at tap-change position 1. If the
limiting is not active, the Relay displays
tap-change position 99, which could easily be
mis-interpreted as an error signal.
High + Low:

Limits both upwards and downwards


Practical meaning:
One can decide individually in each case if the
limiting function is helpful or not.
A general recommendation can therefore not

be
given for this reason.

The menu item Input resolution is only for information


purposes. It displays the resolution with which the input signal
is further internally processed.
In this case 0.05%.

196

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
You can return to the ANALOGUE I/O menu by pressing the
Esc key.
If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual input and
output values of the analogue values are displayed.
AnaR 1 then displays the actual value 20 mA if 20 mA is flowing
in the input.
(AnaR 1= 20 mA).
Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value
of the input quantity.
If 20 mA hardware is being used, then the normalised value
AnaN 1 = 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA
is flowing.

REG - D Operating Manual

197

REG - D
11.2

Analogue outputs

For general information about the analogue channels, see page


187.
The individual steps are explained using an example.
Task: The tap-change position of the Relay should be output as
a mA signal.
i.e. Tap-change positions 0 to 17 4 ... 20 mA
How to proceed:
The Relay must be equipped with an analogue output module
(in the example with a double module for channels 3 and 4).
Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator,
transducer, etc.), select menu and then select SETUP 6 using
the arrow keys.

Press F1 to select General 1.

198

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The submenus which are required for parameterising the
analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.

Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the up and


down arrow keys.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA
Relay can only have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.
The entry channel 1 AI/ANA (AI analogue input) and
channel X AO/ANA (AO analogue output) is created
automatically and shows that channel 1 has an analogue input
and that channel 3 and 4, for example, is hardware-prepared as
an analogue output.
Select channel 3 (F4)

This is ASETUP1 in which the parameters


Analogue function
Analogue unit
Decimal places
can be entered.

REG - D Operating Manual

199

REG - D
The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.
The following functions are available as standard:
Note

o at the beginning of the line stands for output!


OFF

Output is turned off

ANA

Output is assigned a specific function using a


background program

oZero

0 is output

o+FullRng

The upper limit is output (e.g. 20 mA)

o-FullRng

The starting value is output


(e.g. -20 mA)

Note

The three functions can be used to check the output


type (e.g. 20 mA output or 10 mA output) and its
function.

oU

The measured voltage


is displayed as an output

oP

The measured active power


is displayed as an output

oQ

The measured reactive power


is displayed as an output

oS

The measured apparent power


is displayed as an output

oU1

The measured voltage U1


is displayed as an output

oU2

The measured voltage U2


is displayed as an output

Note

The Relay can be equipped with two voltage


transformers, which can be employed for various tasks
(e.g. triple-wound transformers, over and undervoltage
at a transformer, etc.)

200

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The following applies for the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring:
U1:

Voltage between terminals 2 and 5

U2:

Voltage between terminals 8 and 10

Whereas, for the REG-D, the following applies:


The connection points for U1 and U2 can be found in the
planning documents (see appendix).
ol1

The measured current in conductor 1


is displayed as an output

ol2

The measured current in conductor 2


is displayed as an output

ol3

The measured current in conductor 3


is displayed as an output

oPHIDEG

The measured phase angle phi


is displayed as an output

oOCOSPHI

The measured cos phi


is displayed as an output

oFREQ

The measured frequency


is displayed as an output

oOilTemp

The measured oil temperature


is displayed as an output

oWindTemp

The calculated hotpoint temperature


is displayed as an output

oTapPos

The present tap-change position of the


transformer is displayed as an output

Please select oTapPos as an analogue function.

Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.


REG - D Operating Manual

201

REG - D
Analogue unit:
In this case and in most other cases, the analogue unit is fixed,
i.e. the system automatically applies the correct unit (V for
voltage, A for current and Hz for frequency).
However, the unit can be freely selected if ANA is selected.
In such cases, please proceed as described below:
Press F3

The available character sets can be shown by pressing abc


(F1 key).

Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down,
left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.
You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.
F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.

202

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The measurement can be additionally influenced through the
choice of decimal places (F4). For a 20 mA output the second
decimal place represents a value of 0.01%.
If only one decimal place is selected all output values of the
order of 0.01% are surppressed and there is a certain calming
of the output.
Select the number of decimal places appropriate to the task.

Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.

The type of characteristic line can be selected under the


parameter selection menu item.
The following settings are possible:
ALL

Only for special applications


related to old software versions.

Fac+Off

Only for special applications


related to old software versions.

P0P2

Linear characteristic line

P0P1P2

Bent characteristic line

REG - D Operating Manual

203

REG - D
P0P2
A linear characteristic line has two points (beginning and end)
which can be described using the points P0 and P2.
Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y
coordinate.
The characteristic lines are constructed in such a way that mA
values (input or output) are always placed on the y axis in
normalised form.
The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined
by the specific hardware configuration.
Therefore a normalised representation is sensible.
Example:
0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

y
P2-y

P0-y

P2

P0
P0-x

204

P2-x

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
P0P1P2
Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.
In this case, the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as
lying between points P0 and P2.

y
P2

P2-y
P1-y

P1

P0-y

P0
P1-x

P0-x

P2-x

A bent characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.


Select P0P2 using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by
pressing Enter.

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right


arrow key.

REG - D Operating Manual

205

REG - D
The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.
The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined by the
coordinate pairs P0-X (input quantity at the beginning of the
line), P0-Y (output quantity at the beginning of the line)
P2-X (input quantity at the end of the line) and P2-Y (output
quantity at the end of the line).
Select the following characteristic line parameters using F2 to
F5:
P0-X

1 (for tap-change position 1)

P0-Y

0.2 (0.2 x 20 mA = 4 mA)


as a normalised value of the 20 mA output

value.
P2-X

17 (for tap-change position 17)

P2-Y

1 (1 x 20 mA = 20 mA)
as a normalised value of the 20 mA output

value.
Confirm all input information by pressing Enter!

y
P2

P2-y (1)

P0-y (0.2)

P0
1
P0-x

206

17
P2-x

x/tapchange

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right
arrow key.

This SETUP primarily defines how the analogue input should


behave if the range limits are exceeded.
The following options are available under Limit Handling:
None
High
Low
High+Low
Explanations:
None:

no limiting, neither upwards nor downwards

High:

Limiting, upwards only


Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay
would output 20 mA if the
transformer is in tap-change position 20.

Low:

Limiting, downwards only


Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay
will output 4 mA if the level has a
value smaller than 1

High + Low

Limits upwards and downwards


Practical meaning:
One can decide individually in each case if the
limiting function is helpful or not.
A general recommendation can
therefore not be given for this reason.

REG - D Operating Manual

207

REG - D
The built-in simulator can be used to check the settings (see
chapter 8).
Simulate a tap-change (see chapter 8.4 on page 146).

Select SETUP 6, F1, F5 again. The ANALOGUE I/O [1-4] menu


will appear in the display.
If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual output
value of the analogue value will be displayed.
Assuming that tap-change position 17 has been simulated,
AnaR 3 delivers an output of 20 mA. The actual value of AnaR
3 is also 20 mA, and this can be checked using a mA meter.
Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value
of the output quantity.
If 20 mA hardware is being used, the normalised value AnaN 1
= 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA is flowing
(level 1).

The parameterisation has now been completed.


Press the ESC key twice to return to the regulator, transducer,
recorder, etc. in the main menu.

208

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
12

Updating the Operating Software

A zero modem cable is required to update the operating


software. A hardware handshake is also required due to the
high baud rate. For this reason, the RTS/CTS lines must be
linked crosswise.

9-pole Sub-D socket


1 ---------2 ---------3 ---------4 ---------5 ---------6 ---------7 ---------8 ---------9 ---------Shield

REG - D Operating Manual

9-pole Sub-D socket


-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------- 4
---------- 3
---------- 2
---------- 1
---------- 5
---------- 6
---------- 8
---------- 7
---------- 9
Shield

209

REG - D
12.1

Preparing the PC

12.1.1

Windows NT/2000/XP operating system

Open the Control panel window.


Open the System window (1)
Select the Hardware tab (2)
Start the Device manager (3)
Select and open the communication port (COM 1 or COM
2) (4)

Select the Hardware settings tab (5)


Enter settings (6)
Bits/seconds:
Data bits:
Parity:
Stop bits:
Protocol:

115200
8
none
1
Hardware

3
1

5
4

210

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Confirm selection by pressing OK (7)
Close the remaining windows
Connect the cable to the selected PC COM interface.
Connect the cable to the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring at the COM 1 interface.

12.2

Starting the bootstrap loader

In order to update the system software, the bootstrap loader


must be started in the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring. It is only possible to carry out this
procedure in the REG-D Status menu (SETUP 6 / Status
Menu).
F1

press down for


approx. 3 s

Use the F3

key to set the baud rate to exactly the same


value as that of your PC.
F3

Downloading is carried out by means of the update32.exe


program on the PC.

After starting update32.exe, select the interface and press


OK to confirm.

Specify the PC interface in the Configure / Baudrate menu


to be 11520 baud.

REG - D Operating Manual

211

REG - D

Caution!

If a version of the bootstrap loader older than 1.07 (e.g.


1.06) is installed on your REG-D, it must first be updated
to version 1.07. The current bootstrap loader is available
to be downloaded from our website (www.a-eberle.de).
Select the menu item Update / new bootstrap loader
to begin the bootstrap loader update. The firmware can
be updated after successfully updating the bootstrap
loader.

The firmware update can be started by selecting the


Update / update all menu item.

212

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Other items in the update menu:
Firmware:
text.

Update the firmware without the help

Help text:

Update the help text.

REG-L Download:

Transfer background programs


from the PC to the REG-D.

REG-L Upload:
background

Transfer and saving of the


programs from the PC to the REG-D.
Serves to protect the background
programs, since they are not

protected
during the reading of the parameters
with WinREG.
Communication Card
Update:

Data transfer from the PC to the


instrumentation and control card

In newer devices, the program automatically recognises


whether a REG-D or a PAN-D is connected.
If recognition is not possible (this could be the case with
older devices), selection is carried out via a dialogue.

The further process runs automatically. A reset occurs after


completion of the download. A message appears to
indicate that the device is ready for use.

REG - D Operating Manual

213

REG - D
If other messages appear, an error has occurred and the
download must be repeated.

Note

If you have further questions, please send us an E-mail:


info@a-eberle.de

Press F4
Press F5

214

F4

F5

to exit the bootstrap loader.


to abort the data transfer

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
13

Updating Analogue
Inputs, Outputs,
Tap-Change Potentiometer Input

How to proceed:

Remove the front panel of the REG-D


(Unscrew the four crosshead screws and pull off the ribbon
cable)

Remove the REG-CPU board


(Unscrew 2 screws and 2 safety rings, then carefully lift out
the CPU board)

Add the analogue modules to the REG-CPU board and


place it back inside the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring
(Note 2 plug connections)
Available terminals for analogue modules

Module 3

Battery

Module 2 Module 1

REG-CPU board

REG - D Operating Manual

215

REG - D
Analogue module pin assignment
A n a lo g u e c h a n n e ls ( O p tio n E 9 x )

2
.

z
b

4
2

z
4

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

In p u t o r o u tp u t
m o d u le 2
m o d u le 3
+
- +
- +
- +
-

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

-2 0 ... 0 ... + 2 0 m A

m o d u le 1
+
- +
-

b
b

z
z

b
b

z
z

1 4

1 6

1 4

1 6

2 6

2 8

2 6

2 8

After inserting the analogue double module, it will be


automatically recognised and treated accordingly.
The channel assignment is as follows:
Module 1.1 - Channel 1
Module 1.2 - Channel 2
Module 2.1 - Channel 3
Module 2.2 - Channel 4
Module 3.1 - Channel 5
Module 3.2 - Channel 6

Screw the REG-CPU board and front panel back on tightly


(and connect the ribbon cable).

Load firmware version 1.74 using the download program.


Load background and P programmes in the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring (update32.exe)
If a step-change potentiometer module is to be connected to a
terminal at a later date, please consult the accompanying
documentation.

216

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
14

Maintenance and Current


Consumption

14.1

Cleaning information

The surface of the device can be cleaned with a dry cloth at any
time.
If the inside becomes dirty due to improper use, it is
recommended that you send the device back to the
manufacturer.
If a large amount of dust has accumulated on the terminal
blocks, the insulator coordination could fail.
Dust particles are generally hygroscopic and can bridge
creepage distances.
For this reason we recommend operating the device with the
doors closed.

REG - D Operating Manual

217

REG - D
14.2

Changing fuses

Caution!

Before changing fuses, it is essential that the REG-D


Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
disconnected from the power supply!
Required fuse:
T2L 250 V, 2 A microfuse
The fuse holder can be found on terminal block 3 and the
replacement fuse is on the back of terminal block 3.

REG-NTZ

Replacement fuse

14.3

T2A FUSE Fuse holder type 2 A

Changing the battery

Caution!

Before changing the battery it is essential that the REGD Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
disconnected from the power supply!
Required battery:

Lithium 3 V with soldering tags


Type SANYO CR 14250 SE (3 V)

Service life:

in storage > 6 years


when in operation with a switch-on
duration > 50 %
> 10 years

We recommend having the battery changed in the factory.

218

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
14.4

REG-D current consumption

Measuring circuit (100 V DC)


0 ... 150 V
300 mA

1 / 1%

220F
100 V

Sensor head
10:1

30

REG-D

28

GOSSEN

Measuring results
Power-up spike of 100 V DC
6
5
4

3V
=3A

3
2

Measured at

Peak

60 V DC
110 V DC
110 V AC
220 V DC
230 V AC

approx. 2 A
approx. 3 A
approx. 3 A
approx. 5 A
approx. 5 A

7 ms
The measured values provide information regarding the fuse
selection.

REG - D Operating Manual

219

REG - D
15

Storage Information

The devices should be stored in clean, dry rooms. The devices


and their respective replacement modules can be stored
between -25 C and +65 C.
The relative humidity must not cause the formation of either
condensation or ice.
We recommend that the storage temperature remains within
the temperature range -10 C to +55 C to ensure that the builtin electrolytic capacitor does not age prematurely.
We also recommend that the device be connected to an
auxiliary voltage every two years to reform the electrolytic
capacitors. This procedure should also be carried out before
the device is put into operation. In extreme climatic conditions
(tropics), this also simultaneously ensures pre-heating and
helps to avoid the formation of condensation.
The device should be stored in the service room for at least two
hours prior to being connected to the voltage for the first time
so that it can become accustomed to the ambient temperature
there and to avoid the formation of moisture and condensation.

220

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16

Background Information

16.1

Regulator mode

The command variable W and the actual value X of the line


voltage are continuously compared in the Relay in order to
maintain a constant line voltage. The command variable W is
either a fixed value or a variable value which is the sum of fixed
setpoint values and the changeable voltage drop on the lines to
the consumers.
The difference between the actual value X and the control
variable W (the regulative deviation Xw) is calculated according
to a selected function in the Relay and summed until a specified
integral value is reached. As soon as this integral value is
reached, the integrator is set to zero and a signal (correcting
variable) is simultaneously output which triggers the tapchanger (actuator) of the transformer and thus changes its ratio.
The integration begins anew after each tap-change procedure.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
functions as a three-tap-change regulator with a deadband. No
control commands will be output if the actual value lies within
this deadband.
The parameters for the time behaviour of the Relay can be
optimally adapted to the dynamic time behaviour of the line
voltage (controlled system) so that a high degree of control
quality (high voltage constancy) can be achieved with a low
number of changes and the actuator is not overly stressed.
All of the Relays can control several parallel-switched
transformers on one busbar without requiring further devices.
The transformers are regulated according to a specific
algorithm in such a way that the reactive part of the circulating
current is minimised. Thus transformers with different outputs
and different tap-change voltages can also be parallelswitched.

REG - D Operating Manual

221

REG - D
(X)

Voltage
regulation

Uactu
Uset
(W)

Xu=
f (Uactual,
Current
influence

Gradient

Limitation

Raise

Iact
ual

Xi = f (I)

Parallel
programs

(XW)

Integrator

=
=

Lower

Perm. Icr

e.g. Ib
Xp = f (...)

16.2

Command variable W

The command variable W for the voltage of the tap-changing


transformer may either be a fixed value (setpoint value) or a
variable value (setpoint value + a variable). A variable command
variable W can consist of, for example, the sum of a fixed
setpoint value and the share of the voltage drop on a line up to
a certain point in the circuit. This makes it possible to maintain
the voltage at a constant level even if the load and the primary
voltage are changing.

16.2.1

Fixed command variable

The command variable W is input into the Relay as a voltage


setpoint value and remains constant. The Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring maintains the voltage at the
transformer at the setpoint value independent of the primary
voltage and the corresponding load current (the voltage drop
on the line).

Adjusting the setpoint / Switching to a different setpoint value


Normally up to 4 setpoint values can be pre-selected. If the
present setpoint value is to be changed, this change can be
carried out on the Relay either manually or by switching to
another setpoint value which has already been pre-selected. At
the same time the previous setpoint value becomes ineffective.
The change to another setpoint value can be activated either via
an external signal or by using a background program.

222

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.2.2

Variable command variable

The command variable W for regulating the voltage at a given


position on a line is the sum of a fixed setpoint value XR and the
variable value of a correction value XK.
W [V] = XR [V] + XK [V]
The correction value XK takes the data of the assigned line and
load into consideration (voltage drop Uf), so that the voltage at
the given position the load point of the line can be held
approximately constant.
It is assumed that the network is generally loaded
symmetrically, i.e. that the current in each line is approximately
the same. The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring can therefore be connected to the current
transformer of any line (L1, L2, L3).
Measuring the voltage drop Uf on the line
The voltage drop Uf on the line between the transformer and
the consumer is the difference between the r.m.s. values of
both voltages on the busbar and at the load point. The voltage
drop depends on the impedance of the line, the current
strength and the cos at the consumer.
The following formula defines the impedance of a line:
Z = RL + j LL + 1 / j CL

Measuring the voltage drop Uf as a function of the rated current


When the reactances of the line can be neglected and the cos
at the consumer remains constant, the voltage drop Uf can
be measured as a function of the nominal current.
Uf = f (I, R)
The gradient of the Uf/IL characteristic line required for the
correct measurement of Uf must be determined according to
the operating conditions (see Nominal value of the gradient on
page 227).

REG - D Operating Manual

223

REG - D
Control variables for Uf
If the cos at the consumer varies, it is possible to select the
active I cos or the reactive I sin component of the current
as the control variable for Uf rather than current intensity I itself.
The reactive component has either a positive or negative sign
to differentiate between an inductive or a capacitive load
respectively.

Measuring the voltage drop as a function of the current strength and


cos
(LDC = line drop compensation)
If the reactance of the line cannot be neglected when
measuring the voltage drop and the cos at the consumer is
not constant, the following formula l applies for measuring Uf:
Uf = (R + j XL) (I cos 2 - j I sin 2) = R I (cos 2 - j sin 2) + XL
I (sin 2 + j cos 2)
By inputting the values for R and XL, a replica of the line can be
created in the Relay. This enables the voltage difference (of the
r.m.s. values) between the beginning of the line (transformer)
and the selected load point to be measured in relation to the
current intensity and the cos 2. The value can then be used as
the correction value Xk (see Variable command variable on
page 223).
Uf = U1 - U2
The angle at the load point is defined as 2. However, in most
cases the difference between at the transformer and at the
load point may be neglected (see example).
The current and voltage paths (L1, L2, L3 as well as S1/k and
S2/l) must be correctly connected in order to be able to
measure the correct angle.

Example:
Given: R = 30 ; XL = 82 ; I = 100 A; cos 2 = 0.7;
U2 = 110 kV at the end of the line.
When calculating using voltage pointers (for complex quantities
use the E-2.5.2 EXCEL program which can be downloaded
from our website, www.a-eberle.de), the result is the following

224

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
exact value
Uf = U1 - U2 = 7.96 kV. (The angle difference of the voltage
pointer between the beginning and the load point is
approximately 2).
The voltage at the transformer must thus be regulated to the
r.m.s. value U1 = 110 kV + 7.96 kV = 117.96 kV (command
variable W).

Setting R and XL
The differences between the entered values and the actual
values of R and XL as well as the difference between the cos
at the transformer and at the consumer (the voltage indicators
of U1 and U2 have different angles) may be eliminated by
readjusting R and XL.
If values exist for the inductive and resistive voltage drop
between the feeding point and the load point, they can be
converted to resistances (R and X) using a simple mathematical
equation.
Divide the voltages by 10 and enter the resulting values as the
resistances R and X.
Example:

Ux = 12 V
Ur = 25 V

Thus:
X = 1.2 Ohms
R = 2.5 Ohms

REG - D Operating Manual

225

REG - D
16.2.3

Current-dependent setpoint value increment

Determining the voltage levels XR and Uf


The voltage level XR (setpoint value) should correspond to the
required voltage at a minimum current.
The voltage level Uf is a function of the gradient of the linear Uf/
IL-characteristic line. Adding this voltage to the entered setpoint
value XR (increasing the setpoint value) cancels out the voltage
drop on the line.
Various programs are available for incrementing the setpoint
value:

setpoint value increment dependent on apparent current


setpoint value increment dependent on active current
setpoint value increment dependent on reactive current.
The line-drop compensation using the LDC process was
described in the previous chapter.
Apart from the LDC process, the most commonly used method
is compensation based on the apparent current and this is
described in more detail below.
Uf [V]

107.5 V

7.5 V

21.5 kV

6.563 V

4.688 V

100 V

20 kV

0
0

100 A
0.625 A

700 A 800 A

IL

4.375 A 5 A

Please observe that the positive or negative sign of the active


power is taken into consideration when the current-dependent
setpoint value is increased.
The current-dependent setpoint value increment is active if
power is being consumed and is inactive when power is being
supplied.
This procedure - which works in the interest of network
operation - can only be carried out properly and reliably when
the direction of the active power is input correctly.

226

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
In this case a positive sign for active power indicates incoming
power (setpoint value increment permissible), whereas a
negative sign indicates outgoing power, and the setpoint
increment function is disabled.
The connections for both the voltage and the current must be
correctly assigned in order to detect the direction of the active
power.
Therefore, please check the connections for current and
voltage, as well as the assignments (SETUP 5, F2) and lastly
check the sign for active power in the transducer mode.
Nominal value of the gradient
The nominal value of the gradient Gnom indicates the % change
in the nominal voltage when the current strength changes from
0 to 100% of the I1n nominal current of the current transformer
that is mounted in the network.
U [ V ]
St Nom [ % ] = ---------------------- 100%
U Nom [ V ]
UNom = 100 V
(U in relation to IL [A])
Thus for the voltage Uf = f (I)
St Nom [ % ]
I actual [ A ]
Uf [ V ] = U [ V ] = ------------------------- U Nom [ V ] ------------------------

100%
I 1N [ A ]

Limitation of the voltage level Uf


To prevent the command variable from exceeding a certain limit
value in the event of overcurrent, the gradient of the linear Uf/IL
characteristic line must be set to zero from a specified value of
the current onwards. The characteristic line is horizontal after
this point.

REG - D Operating Manual

227

REG - D
Measuring the required gradient
The two value pairs, voltage and current strength, must be
known at a light load as well as at full load to measure the
required nominal value Gnom [%].
Please note that the gradient and the setpoint value cannot be
set independently from each other for this type of characteristic
line, because when Gnom [%] is > 0%, the command variable W,
which is already at the minimum current value Imin > 0, would be
unintentionally increased.

Example:
The voltage at a particular point in the network is to be held
constant at 20 kV under a variable load.
Nominal values of the voltage transformer:
U1n = 20 kV; U2n = 100 V; Knu = 200
Nominal values of the current transformer:
I1n = 800 A; I2n = 5 A; Kni = 160
Measured value pairs:
Values at
light load Pmin

Values at
full load Pmax

Current intensity I Imin = 100 A

Imax = 700 A

Control variable w wmin = 20.5 kV

wmax = 21.5 kV

Primary side:
The difference between the currents
I [A] = Imax - Imin = 700 A - 100 A = 600 A
Secondary side (primary values/Kni):
The difference between the currents
I [A] = Imax - Imin = 4.375 A - 0.625 A = 3.750 A
Absolute voltage change
U [V] = 21.5 kV - 20.5 kV = 1.0 kV
Voltage change in percent
U [%] = (1.0 kV / 20.0 kV) 100 % = 5 %

228

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
To raise the voltage of the transformer at full load (Imax) to
21.5 kV, the command variable must be U = 1.0 kV, or 5% of
the nominal voltage U1n higher than the set setpoint value XR.

Calculating the nominal value of the gradient Gnom [%]


I 1N
U [ V ]
St Nom [ % ] = ---------------------- 100 % -------I
U Nom [ V ]
1.0 kV
A- = 6.67 %
St Nom [ % ] = ---------------- 100 % 800
-------------20 kV
600 A

Setpoint value reduction


With a light load and this gradient, the command variable W
would be increased to
I min St Nom
W = 1 + --------- -------------- U Nom
I 1n 100%
100 A 6.67%
W = 1 + --------------- --------------- 20.5 kV = 20.67 kV
800 A 100%
This corresponds to (100 A / 800 A) 6.67% = 0.83% of the
nominal voltage.
Thus, the setpoint value XR would have to be set lower by
0.83% in order to maintain the voltage level at 20.5 kV during a
light load.

Adjusting the settings


At full load, the reduction of the setpoint value, however, causes
the command variable W to be lowered so that a compromise
must be found between the increase in Gnom [%] and the
decrease in the reduction of the setpoint value.

REG - D Operating Manual

229

REG - D
Set the setpoint value and the gradient as follows

Voltage

Voltage

at full load

at light load

Too high

Correct

Setpoint no change,
lower the gradient

Too low

Correct

Setpoint no change,
increase the gradient

Setpoint value
setting

Setpoint value
setting

Action

at full load

at light load

Correct

Too high

reduce setpoint
value
increase the gradient

Correct

Too low

increase the setpoint


value
lower the gradient

16.3

Action

Summary and Examples


for Current Influencing

Parameters
Gradient:
Specifies the setpoint value increment compared to 100 V with
nominal current.
e.g. Gradient, Grad., = 5 %:
When the nominal current is reached, the voltage is
increased by 5 % of 100 V. The nominal current can be
1/5 A. In this case, when the nominal current is reached the
setpoint value increases by 5 V.
Limitation:
Max. setpoint value increment in % compared to 100 V.
e.g. Limitation, Lim., = 4%:
Max. voltage increment of 4 % compared to 100 V is 4 V.

230

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
No further increase takes place once the 4 V limit is
reached.
The tolerance band remains unchanged. The permissible
regulative deviation is not affect by the voltage increase.
The setpoint value, corrected to include the voltage increase, is
not shown. However, it is indicated by the black colour of the
arrow in the bar graph display.
Current-dependent voltage increase
The currently-active setpoint value Uset,corr. is calculated as
follows:
I
In

Grad
xd
U = --------------- 100 V ------

U set, corr = U set + U

100 %

If U > B, then U is limited to the size of B.

Setpoint value [V]


107
106

Upper
tolerance band

105
Setpoint
104
103

Lower
tolerance band

102
101

Gradient = 5 %
Limitation = 4 %

100

Setpoint value = 100 V = 100 %


99

Permissible regulative deviation = 1 %

98
0

0.2

0.4
0.6
Current normalised to 1/5 A.

0.8

Current-influencing programs
Apparent current: Ixd = I
The apparent current is used to determine the voltage increase.
Increases only take place when the active power is positive.
REG - D Operating Manual

231

REG - D
This method can be used to compensate the voltage drop if
cos is relatively constant.
Active current: Isd = Iw = I x cos (with +/- sign)
The active current is used to determine the change in the
setpoint value. If a negative active current flows (energy fed
back), the setpoint value is decreased. The limitation is
symmetrical and applies to both increases and decreases.
Reactive current: Ixd = Ib = I x sin (with +/- sign)
The reactive current is used to determine the voltage increase.
The increase/decrease is independent of the sign of the active
power. It is increased if the reactive current is inductive, and
decreased if it is capacitive.
This program is primarily used if the cos of the network varies
by a large amount.
LDC (Line Drop Compensation):
Used to compensate the voltage drop on a line when the active
and reactive resistances are known. This process can also be
used if the cos of the consumer is not constant. The gradient
is not required for this process. The limitation, however,
continues to apply.
Abbreviations
Current used to determine the voltage increase [A]
Ixd:
I:

Apparent current, measurement quantity [A]

Iw:

Active current [A]

Ib:

Reactive current [A]

In:

Nominal current of the current transformer 1/5 A [A]

Grad.:

Gradient [%]

Lim.:

Limitation [L]

B:

Limitation of the voltage increase [V]

U:

Increase in setpoint value [V]

Uset:

Specified setpoint value [V]

Uset,corr the setpoint value corrected to include the voltage


increase [V]

232

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.4

Regulative deviations

16.4.1

Regulative deviation Xw

The regulative deviation Xw is the difference between the actual


value X of the regulating variable and the command variable W.
The sign of the regulative deviation can be plus or minus.
Note

The regulative deviation Xw corresponds to the negative


regulation difference Xd.

[ % ] W [ V -]
Xw [ V ] = X [ V ] W [ V ] = Xw
----------------------------------100 %
Xw [ V ]
Xw [ % ] = ---------------- 100 %
W[V]

16.4.2

Permissible regulative deviation Xwz

To minimise the number of switches of the tap-changer, a


deviation in the line voltage from the command variable W is
tolerated within certain limits, i.e. a specific regulative deviation
is permissible.
This permissible regulative deviation Xwz is entered as a n%
of the control variable W (independent of all the other limit values
expressed in %) and sets the limits for the maximum
permissible relative fluctuation of the line voltage above and
below the control value W. For this reason the absolute limit
values of the tolerance band are dependent on the set control
variable W.
When the line voltage dips into this tolerance band, the
regulation process is interrupted and the integrator is set to
zero so that the regulation/integration process only begins
again when the line voltage overshoots or undershoots the
limits of the tolerance band.
Thus fluctuations in the line voltage within the permissible
regulative deviation have no effect on the regulation process.

REG - D Operating Manual

233

REG - D
16.4.3

Displaying the permissible regulative deviation Xw

The deviation of the line voltage X from the command variable


W is indicated analogously on the scale of the Relay. The colour
of the pointer changes from light to dark when the voltage
exceeds the permissible regulative deviation Xwz.
When indicating the permissible regulative deviation Xwz, the
setpoint value correction Xk for compensating the voltage drop
in the line is not taken into consideration.

16.4.4

Setting the permissible regulative deviation Xwz

The tolerance band determined by the permissible regulative


deviation Xwz ( n% of the control variable W) must be higher than
the tap-change of the transformer in percent, because
otherwise the changed output voltage of the transformer would
violate the opposite limit of the permissible regulative deviation
after a control command has been executed. Furthermore,
after having reached the integral value, a control command
would be output to reset the previous transformer tap-changer
position. This procedure would be constantly repeated, i.e. this
would lead to frequent tap-changes of the transformer and thus
to unwanted fluctuations in the line voltage.
In order to have sufficient distance from the upper and lower
limits of the permissible regulative deviation, the following
formula applies
2 | Xwz [%]| > UTap [%]
or
| Xwz [%]| > 0.5 UTap [%]

Guide value for Xwz


The following guide value is generally recommended for the
permissible regulative deviation Xwz:

| Xwz [%]| 0.6 UTap [%]

234

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Example for determining the permissible regulative deviation
Nominal voltage

UNom = 100 kV

Number of levels

15

Setting range

85 kV ... 115 kV

Tap-change increment:

(115 kV - 85 kV): 30 levels =


1 kV / tap-change

Thus 1 kV corresponds to the value of 1% of Unom


With this data, the permissible regulative deviation Xwz should
not be less than the value Xwz = 0.6 1.0 kV = 0.6 kV (
0.6%) The absolute limits are thus 100.6 kV and 99.4 kV.
If, for example, the upper limit is exceeded and the voltage is set
back by one tap-change, the voltage is reduced to 100.6kV
1.0 kV = 99.6 kV, i.e. the lower limit of 99.4 kV is not undershot.
The voltage remains within the range of the permissible
regulative deviation.

16.5

Monitoring extreme operation values


(faults)

If a fault occurs in the network, e.g. inadmissibly or extremely


high/low voltages or currents, the Relay must not switch the
transformer tap-changer to the highest or lowest tap-changer
position. This occurs to prevent the line voltage having an
impermissible value after the cause of the fault has been
eliminated. These monitoring tasks are carried out by additional
limit signals.

16.5.1

Limit signal

Switching time delay


The difference in time between when the limit value is reached
and when the signal is transmitted is defined as the time delay.
A specific time delay can be selected (parameterised) for each
limit signal.
Note

Please note that the actual switching time delay can


exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measured values.
REG - D Operating Manual

235

REG - D
Switching hysteresis, switching difference Xsd
The difference in the input values between the switching on and
off of the limit signal after the limit value violation has
disappeared is defined as the switching difference. The
hysteresis Xsd has a standard value of 1% of 100 V
(corresponds to 1 V).

Assignment of the limit signal


Each of the following limit values is monitored by one limit
signal. A special additional function is activated for certain types
of limit signals.
In the menu you have the option of selecting if a binary output
or LED should be activated if a limit value violation occurs.
Note

Any number of additional limit signals can be generated


via the REG-L programming language (as a background
program).
Setting the limit values/plausibility check
The limit signal can be set freely for each limit signal within a
given range. Therefore the user must check the logical relations
of the values with each other.

Limit signal trigger (G1)


When U > G1: Activation of the INHIBIT LOW Relay function (no
control commands are output) in the event of undervoltage.
Setting range: 100 V G1 150 V
The limit signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel
4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... REl 10 if required.
The limit value violation is displayed on the screen and can be
additionally signalled via a freely programmable LED (LED 1 ...
LED7).

Backwards high-speed switching limit signal (G2)


When U > G2: Activation of the BACKWARDS HIGH-SPEED
SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series
of control commands, see High-speed switching Add-On on
page 240).

236

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Setting range: 1.00 X0 G2 1.35 X0 (0% ... +35%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).
No more control commands will be output after the dip into the
tolerance band Xwz. The limit signal can be connected to a
binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required.
Furthermore, the limit value violation can be signalled by a freely
programmable LED (LED1 ... LED7).
Forward high-speed switching limit signal (G3)
When U < G3: Activation of the FORWARDS HIGH-SPEED
SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series
of control commands, see High-speed switching Add-On on
page 240).
This function is not available if the Relay is operated in the
Creeping Net Breakdown mode.
Reason: A rapid sequence of raise commands cause the Relay
to switch to standstill.
Setting range: 0.65 X0 G3 1.00 X0 (-35% ... 0%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).
The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel
3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the
limit value violation can be signalled using a freely
programmable LED.

Limit signal > U (G4)


The overvoltage >U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage exceeds the >U limit then all raise commands
are surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation when
operating with several setpoints and using an absolute value
(100 V / 110 V) as the limit value for >U.
Setting range: 0 ... +25% *
Further information: see > U Overvoltage on page 112
REG - D Operating Manual

237

REG - D
Limit signal >I (G5)
I > G5: selectable action and activation of the STANDSTILL
Relay function (no control commands are output) in the event of
overcurrent. However, the STANDSTILL function will only be
activated if it has been previously activated in the menu AddOn 5. The activate function is signalled by an LED on the front
panel of the REG-D.
The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) always applies as the limit
value reference X0.
Setting range: 1.00 X0 G5 2.10 X0 (0% ... 210%)

Limit value transmitter < U (G6)


The undervoltage <U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all lower commands are
surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for <U.
Setting range: -25% ... 0% *
Further information: see < U Undervoltage on page 111

Limit value transmitter <I (G7)


I < G7: Activation of the STANDSTILL Relay function in the
event of undercurrent (no issuing of control commands).
Setting range: 0.0 X0 G7 1.00 X0
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value.
You can chose 100 V or 110 V as the reference value for the
setpoint.
(See also Add-On 5, F2)
The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel
3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the
limit value violation can be signalled by a freely programmable
LED (LED1 ... LED7).

238

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) applies as the limit value
reference.

Inhibit low limit value transmitter (G8)


When U < G8: Activation of the limit signal and of the
STANDSTILL Relay function (no issuing of control commands
see Relay inhibit low function on page 241).
Setting range: 0.25 X0 G8 1.00 X0 (-75% ... +0%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value.
You can chose 100 V or 110 V as the reference value for the
setpoint.
(See also Add-On 5, F2)
The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel
3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the
limit value violation can be signalled using a freely
programmable LED.

Reference value X0 and reference value for the limit values


The upper and lower limit value may be set as a relative value in
% of the present setpoint value or as an absolute value in
relation to the nominal value of the voltage Unom see
Parameters on page 292.
Example for relative limits:
If the Setpoint value X is selected as the reference value, all of
the limit values change in relation to the respective entered
setpoint value.
Setpoint value: X = 102.0 V; limit values: 10%;
thus the upper limit is 112.2 V and the lower limit is 91.8 V.
Example for absolute limits:
If Unom= 100 V is selected as the reference value, all of the limit
values refer to the nominal voltage of 100 V and are
independent of the present setpoint value.
Reference value: Unom = 100 V, Setpoint: 105 V, limit values:
10% of Unom; thus the lower limit is 90 V and the upper limit is
110 V.

REG - D Operating Manual

239

REG - D
16.6

Add-Ons

16.6.1

High-speed switching Add-On

Using the high-speed switching add-on switches off the


reaction delay (regulation behaviour, see page 245), i.e. the
control commands for the tap-changer are output in the
shortest possible time sequence.
The Relay quickly regulates the tap-changer via successive
control commands in the same direction (RAISE or LOWER)
back to a tap-changer position with which the voltage of the
transformer is within the permissible regulative deviation.
The high-speed switching then becomes inactive again.
This ensures that transformer output voltages that are too high
or too low are quickly eliminated.
The user can set the shortest time between control commands
(the tap-changer in operation time) according to the time
requirement of a tap-change operation (SETUP 5, F1, F2) so
that only command change operations that can be carried out
are given.
There are two different types of control to avoid the tapchanger drives being triggered by a sequence of control
commands that is too fast.

If a Relay input E1 ... E16 is configured as the tap-changer


in operation input (with the exception of E5 and E6), the
Relay will not output the control commands until 2 s after
the tap-changer in operation drops.

If the tap-changer in operation is not output to the Relay, the


Relay will output the control commands with a time
separation corresponding to the set maximum time tapchanger in operation (SETUP 5 - Add-On 1).

Activation
The high-speed switching operation of the Relay is activated
either internally (standard program) or externally via a binary
signal. A binary input signal can also be used to activate the
high-speed switching operation even if the actual voltage value
is not sufficient to require it.

240

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.6.2

Relay inhibit low function

The output of control commands to the tap-changer is blocked


in inhibit low (standstill) mode (the output is set to a standstill).
The standstill is active until the line voltage no longer violates the
limit value for the standstill. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will continue to function again normally
approximately 5 s after the line voltage violation has ended.

Activation
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
switched to inhibit low either internally (standard program) or
externally via a binary signal.

G1

Trigger

G2

Backward highspeed

G4

>U

Setpoint

Permissible
regulative
<U
Forward highspeed
Undervoltage
inhibit low

G6
G3
G8
Tap-changes
Raise
Lowe

REG - D Operating Manual

241

REG - D
16.6.3

Measuring the Creeping Net Breakdown

The Creeping Net Breakdown add-on is mainly used to


increase the voltage back to the starting value if the voltage on
the high voltage side has fallen for a certain period of time.
A Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring generally
initially reacts with tap-changes in the direction of a higher
voltage in such cases to maintain a constant secondary
voltage.
If the voltage on the primary side suddenly returns to its default
value, the transformer will be set to a tap that is too high (high
voltage) and will have to be regulated back in the direction of a
lower voltage.
In order to steady the network, these procedures may be
optimised by means of the Creeping Net Breakdown add-on.
If the regulative deviation is so large that - during a certain time
period - more than a specified number of control commands in
the same direction (only RAISE) is required to eliminate the
regulative deviation, the REG-D can react in two different ways:

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring


does not output any control commands. It leaves the
AUTOMATIC operation mode and remains in the
MANUAL operation mode until the switchover back to
AUTOMATIC is carried out, either via the MANUAL key or
via a remote control command.

The Relay blocks all further control commands for a lock


time (1 min ... 20 min).
This lock is automatically removed by the following:
a) after the selected lock time has run out
or
b) after the first LOWER control command is output
(i.e. when the upper limit of the regulative deviation
is violated).

242

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The creeping net breakdown function is cancelled if the
measurement value returns to being within the permissible
range or if a LOWER command is issued.
Note

The Creeping Net Breakdown function suppresses


the Forward High-Speed Switching function.
This function is not suitable for operating medium-voltage networks.
This is due to the fact that in the standard version (equipped
with one only voltage measurement!), the Relay cannot
recognise whether the change in the secondary side voltage is
due to a creeping net breakdown on the primary side or a
change in the load on the secondary side. Changes in the load
on the secondary side must, of course, be immediately
rectified.
In general, this function can only be reliably achieved by
implementing an additional voltage measurement on the
primary side.
In this manner, the Relay can decide even in medium-voltage
networks whether the fault is on the primary or the secondary
side. This requires an additional program which can be ordered
from our company headquarters as needed.
From firmware version 2.04 onwards a regulative procedure is
possible in which the secondary side of the transformer is
regulated whilst deriving the creeping net breakdown
information from the primary side only (since it is equipped with
two voltage transformers (M+)).
If you are interested in this, please contact our headquarters.

REG - D Operating Manual

243

REG - D
16.6.4

Add-On: monitoring the maximum tap-change


difference

ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel


error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to
the MANUAL operation mode.
ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two
transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the
specified permissible difference.
An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not
desired. Otherwise only the Relay that carried out the tapchange that lead to the permissible maximum tap difference
being exceed will be switched over to the MANUAL operation
mode.
Note

If you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company


headquarters.

16.6.5

Add-On: monitoring the tap-changer

After receiving the control command, the Relay controls the


correct switching of the tap-changer by detecting the tapchange signal (tap-changer in operation) sent back by the tapchanger and then compares this value with the maximum tapchange in operation time which was previously set via the menu
(Setup 5, Add-On 1).
If the tap-change signal continues to be output for a longer
period of time, it is possible that the tap-changer has an error.
The tap-change operation can be interrupted using a freely
programmable output R 3, R 4, R 5, R 7 ... R10.

244

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.7

Time behaviour of the Relay when a control


command is output

Requirements
The optimal time behaviour of the Relay can be achieved
through the maximum voltage constancy parameter at the
minimum number of tap-changes. Moreover, large regulative
deviations should be rectified faster than small regulative
deviations.
There are two options for complying with the requirements
specified above:

The regulative deviations are summed up to a specified


integral value before the Relay outputs a control command.
If the line voltage dips into the tolerance band ( Xwz) before
this integral value is reached, the integrator will be set to
zero.

The regulative deviations are constantly evaluated before


the integration by means of a selected function (defined as
Xwb). Depending on the selected function, the evaluation
factor is increased either linearly or non-linearly according to
the amount of the regulative deviation. Therefore, large
regulative deviations (voltage deviations) are rectified faster
than small ones. Large deviations in the voltage from the
command variable trigger a control command after a short
period of time (the integral value is reached quickly),
whereas small voltage deviations take longer to trigger a
control command.
Basic time and time factor
The evaluation factor variable of the regulative deviation Xw is
not indicated directly, rather it is indicated as the time tg in
seconds which passes from the beginning of the integration to
the triggering of a control command provided that the regulative
deviation is constant. Thus, the relationship between the
regulative deviation and the reaction time can be recognised
immediately.
If, for operational reasons, a slower reaction of the Relay is
desired, the time tg may be increased by multiplying it with the
time factor FZ
(0.1 ... 30).
REG - D Operating Manual

245

REG - D
The time interval that elapses between the signalling of a control
command and the actual triggering of a control command is in
part determined by the switching time delay.

tv = tb Ft

Time behaviour of the Relay


The switching time delay tv is thus dependent on the present
value of the regulative deviation Xw, the selected characteristic
line Xw/tg and the entered value of the time factor Ft, for a set
permissible regulative deviation Xwz.
Reaction time tv

3%

3%
2%

2%
1%

1%

Present negative
regulative deviation

Present positive
regulative deviation
Permissible regulative
deviation

Setpoint value

Permissible regulative
deviation

Deadband

Since the permissible regulative deviation applies for both


positive as well as for negative regulative deviations, only the
positive side of the regulative deviation is usually depicted.

246

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.7.1

Determining the reaction delay tv

Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour:


U*t=const)

Reaction time tg [sec]


30
25
Set permissible
regulative deviation

20
15
10
5
0

0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]

10

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the


following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:
Time factor = 1
Set regulative deviation = 1%
Present regulative deviation = 2%

Time until tap-change: 15 s


Note

Please note that the actual switching time delay can


exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measured values.

REG - D Operating Manual

247

REG - D
Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: REG5A/E)
Reaction time tg [sec]
30
25
Set permissible
regulative deviation

20
15
10
5
0

0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]

10

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the


following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:
Time factor = 1
Set regulative deviation = 1%
Present regulative deviation = 2%

Time until tap-change: 10 s


Note

Please note that the actual switching time delay can


exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measured values.
Example:
The permissible regulative deviation is set to Xwz = 2%, the
time factor is set to 5. From the set of curves, the curve for Xwz
= 2% has been selected. Using the curve, one obtains the
following values in the table:

248

Xw [%] = [(X - W)/W] 100%

2%

3%

4%

5%

10%

Basic time tg (s) from the curve

30 s

16 s

10 s

7s

2s

Switching time delay


= basic time time factor

5 30 s
= 150 s

5 16 s
= 80 s

5 10 s
= 50 s

57s
= 35 s

52s
= 10 s

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
How to proceed:
Determine the point of intersection of the Y-coordinate at Xw
with the curve of the permissible regulative deviation set on the
Relay. The value of the Y-coordinate corresponds to the basic
time (see graphic).

Linear characteristic line Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: linear)

Reaction time tg [sec]


30
Set permissible
regulative deviation

25
20
15
10
5
0

0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]

10

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the


following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:
Set regulative deviation = 2%
Present regulative deviation = 4%

Time until tap-change: 24 s


Note

Please note that the actual switching time delay can


exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measured values.

REG - D Operating Manual

249

REG - D
16.7.2

Integrated time program

Both the delta U * t = const and REG- 5A/E time programs


function in the following manner: after the integral of the sum of
the voltage deviation U and the time t has reached a
specified value, a tap-change operation is carried out and after
this the integrator is reset to zero.
If the voltage leaves the voltage band directly after a regulating
procedure, the Relay waits for the time specified in the
algorithm (time from the characteristic curve multiplied with the
time factor) before it initiates another control procedure.
Considering a bucket that is asymmetrically hung is helpful for
understanding the two integrating procedures.

Picture 1
Memory is filled with a
small regulative deviation

Picture 2
Memory is filled with a
large regulative deviation

The bucket tips when it is filled and this is analogous to a stepchange operation carried out by the Relay.
The analogy can be interpreted as follows:
The greater the amount of water that flows into the bucket per
unit time (the larger the voltage deviation), the quicker the
bucket will fill up and tip over (the Relay carries out a tapchange).
The smaller the amount of water that flows into the pail per unit
of time (the smaller the voltage deviation), the longer it takes for
the bucket to fill up and tip over (the Relay carries out a tapchange).
The volume of water flowing (e.g. m3/unit time) corresponds to
the voltage deviation.

250

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
This algorithm is based on the operating experience that small
regulative deviations do not need to be rectified immediately,
since in general they do not lead to a fault in the operation and
also they can often heal themselves due to changes to the
load (voltage returns to being within the bandwidth again).
The setpoint value and bandwidth boundaries are generally
parameterised such that the voltage lies in the middle of the
tolerance band.
In situations in which the voltage has changed such that it still
lies within the band but close to the limit due to a particular load
situation or a change to the primary voltage, small changes in
the voltage or the load will always lead to a band violation.
However, since small regulative deviations are accompanied by
a long integration or reaction time (it takes a long time for the
bucket to fill), the voltage spends a large part of a particular
amount of time outside the permissible band.
In such cases, specific intervention of the Relay is desired.

16.7.3

Trend memory

The Trend memory parameter can be used to accelerate all


the algorithms.
It functions as follows:
If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, the integration process
is initiated the bucket is filled. The Relay performs a tapchange operation after a certain time has elapsed, which is
determined by various parameters (the entered permissible
regulative deviation, the actual regulative deviation, time factor).
If the voltage returns to the bandwidth without the Relay having
issued a tap-change command, the integrator is only reset to
zero after the time that is parameterised for the trend memory
has elapsed and not immediately.
However, if the voltage leaves the tolerance band again a short
time later, the tap-change command will tend to be issued
earlier because the integrator was not emptied and so will
become full quicker.
However, once a tap-changing command is issued, the
memory is set back to zero.
Therefore by using the trend memory parameter it can be
achieved that the integrator is not immediately reset to zero if
the voltage returns to being within the permissible tolerance
band. If the voltage leaves the bandwidth at a point in time at
REG - D Operating Manual

251

REG - D
which the memory has not been completely emptied, the Relay
can react earlier, since the integration procedure or filling
procedure doesnt start from zero, but rather at a higher level.
In general: The time, which is derived from the selected time
program, is crucial to the memory loading process which
triggers a tap-change operation when the memory is 100% full.
However, the emptying of the memory is dependent on the time
that is specified as the trend memory time.
Note

For the delta U * t = const and


REG 5A/E time programs, the time to be entered for
loading of the memory can be derived from the
appropriate curves. For the Const time program use
time T1 (see page 252).
Note

The function of the trend memory is explained using an


example at the end of this section.
A progress bar is incorporated in the Relay screen so that the
present trend memory level can be judged by the user.
The progress bar is displayed as a black bar at the bottom of
the screen. The bar is black when the memory is filling (i.e. the
voltage lies outside of the tolerance band), and when it is
emptying it changes colour and become lighter.
A tap-change operation is carried out when the bar reaches the
right hand side of the screen. If the bar is invisible, this means
that the trend memory has been completely emptied.

16.7.4

Const time program

Const stands for constant reaction times, which cannot


sensitively be adjusted to the respective regulative deviations,
as is
the case for the delta U * t = const or REG- 5A/E
procedures.
In these programs, two differing times are specified, which
cause the Relay to perform a tap-change operation dependent
on the extent of the regulative deviation.

252

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Time T1 is effective if the voltage has a value that lies outside of
the voltage band, but which can be brought back within the
band with a single tap-change operation. T2 is valid when larger
deviations have to be rectified.
The limit above which T2 is valid is therefore the same as the
specified permissible regulative deviation.

Example:
Permissible regulative deviation is 2%
Actual regulative deviation is 3%
T1 = 10 s, T2 = 3 s

The Relay uses the time T1


U
T2
4%

T1

3%
2%

10 s

Setpoint 100%

-2%

T1
-4%

T2

REG - D Operating Manual

253

REG - D
Permissible regulative deviation is 2%
Actual regulative deviation is 5%
T1 = 10 s, T2 = 3 s

The Relay uses the time T2


U
T2
4%

3s

T1

3%
2%
10 s
Setpoint 100%

-2%

T1
-4%

T2

One advantage of this procedure is that in the case of regulative


deviations which are larger than one tap-change, the operator
can easily see when the next tap-change command will be
issued.
A disadvantage compared to the other procedures is that over
a long period of time the number of tap-changes will probably
be larger than would be the case for the U * t = const. and
REG 5A/E regulation algortihms.
As a general settings recommendation, the time T2 should be
shorter than time T1 since large regulative deviations should be
rectified more quickly than small ones.
Of course, the absolute values of the times in this case also
depend on the specific conditions at the respective feeding
point (load structure and behaviour etc.).
Sensible values for the trend memory can also only be derived
from practical experience.

254

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The Const time program and the way the trend memory
operates should be explained using an example.
Parameters:
Time program:

Const

T1:

40 seconds

Trend memory:

20 seconds

T 1 = 4 0 s
+ 1 %
S W
T 0

-1 %

Integrator
In te g r a to r T 1
(m it
T1
1
T r e n d trend
(with
0
s p e ic h e r )
memory)
0
0
0

e Set
i n g tolerance
e s t e l l t e s band
T o le r a n z b a n d

,0


t

Tap-change
S tu fu n g
position

,8
,6
,4

,2

s
1 0
i

2 0

3 0

4 0

ii

iii

Tap-changes
S tu fu n g e n
h Raise
h e r

Lower
tie fe r
0

1 0

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

6 0

Integrator
In te g r a to r T 1
(o h n e
T1
1 ,0
T re n d (without
s p e ic h e r )
0 ,8
trend
0 ,6
memory)

Tap-change
S tu fu n g
position

0 ,4

0 ,2

Tap-changes
S tu fu n g e n
h Raise
h e r
Lower
tie fe r

s
T 0

1 0

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

6 0

"

7 0

s
0

REG - D Operating Manual

1 0

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

6 0

7 0

255

REG - D
The entire situation is illustrated in five diagrams.
Diagram 1 shows the progression of the voltage with time.
The voltage leaves the tolerance band at time T0 and returns
again 20 seconds later.
After a further 10 seconds, the voltage leaves the permissible
tolerance band again, and after 30 seconds a lower tapchange is issued by the Relay which returns the value to within
the band.
Diagram 2 shows how full the trend memory is (fill level). The
Relay performs a tap-change if the fill level reaches the
normalised value 1. If, on the other hand, the graph reaches
the x-axis, the memory is completely emptied.
Diagram 3 shows the sequence of control commands which are
issued by the Relay when voltage deviations occur.
Diagrams 4 und 5 show the behaviour that occurs without the
trend memory.
After 20 seconds the integrator for T1 is reset to zero, and after
30 seconds it begins to fill again starting from zero.
A further 40 seconds (T1) are required to fill the memory to a
level where a tap-change command is issued.
The way the trend memory operates can be best illustrated
using diagram 2.
In order to explain the individual steps more clearly, the diagram
has been divided into three sections, i, ii and iii.
Section i: The voltage is outside the voltage band, the integrator
for time T1 is running.
If the voltage were to remain outside the tolerance band for 40
seconds, the Relay would issue a control command. However,
since the voltage returns to being within the tolerance band
after 20 seconds, the regulation procedure is surpressed.
Section ii: The integrator for time T1 is half full (50% or 20
seconds in total). Emptying now begins according to the time
that has been entered for the trend memory (100% = > 20
seconds).
Section iii: The voltage only remains inside the permissible
tolerance band for 10 seconds and then exceeds the allowed
voltage range again.

256

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
During this time the integrator could only be reduced from 50%
to 25% full (20 seconds to 10 seconds). If the voltage now
remains outside the band for a further 30 seconds the Relay will
issue a tap-change command.
For the voltage progression described in the example the time
before the Relay intervenes is reduced from 70 seconds to 60
seconds by employing the trend memory (refer also to
diagrams 4 and 5).

16.7.5

Setting the time factor Ft

For a normal 24 hour load curve, an empirical value between 2


and 3 is suitable for the time factor. If the 24-hour load curve is
more constant, the rectification process can be accelerated by
choosing a smaller time factor.

REG - D Operating Manual

257

REG - D
16.8

E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network)

Each bus station (REG-D) has two E-LAN interfaces each. Socalled line-to-line operation is enabled through these interfaces.
In this operation mode, each Relay works as a bus station and,
at the same time, as a bus repeater which regenerates
distorted rectangular forms and which increases the output
level to the setpoint value. Up to 255 bus stations can be
connected to the E-LAN.
All bus stations can thus communicate with each other or be
centrally controlled (see WinREG operating manual for selection
and details).
Features
255 bus stations can be addressed

Multimaster structure
Integrated repeater function
Open ring, bus or combination of bus and ring
Record based on SDLC/HDLC frames
Transmission rate 15.6 ... 325 kbits/s
Telegram length 10 ... 30 bytes
Average throughput approx. 100 telegrams/s
For technical data and the pin assignment, please refer to page
33.
For information on the Configuration, see E-LAN (Energy-Local
Area Network) on page 96.
110 kV
T1

T4

T2
M

20 kV

REG - D
Status
< U1
> U2
>I

12:34:00

A:REG-D
Regulator Mode
1. Setpoint

Tap-Changer Pos

Strung

Lauflampe

< U1

Strung
St ufensch alter

Rckfhrung

> U2

Auslsung

Status

F1
F2

< U1

l uft

> U2
>I

Leit ungsschalt er

>> U3

F5

a. eberle gmbh
12:34:00

A:REG-D
Regulator Mode
1. Setpoint

REG - D
F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation
Tap-Changer Pos

Status
F2
F3

-10 %

a. eberle gmbh
12:34:00

A:REG-D

< U1

Regulator Mode

> U2

1. Setpoint

>I

0
F4

>> U4

+10 %

20 kV

REG - D
Status

Regler

F3

0
F4

-10 %

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation

20 kV

PAN - D

a. eberle gmbh

F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation
Tap-Changer Pos

F2
F3

+10 %

F4
F5

>I

-10 %

+10 %
F5

COM1

MENU

AUTO

COM1

Test

AUTO

ESC

MENU

COM1

COM3
M
REG - D

PAN - D

a. eberle gmbh

a. eberle gmbh

a. eberle gmbh

BIN-D
Status

12:34:00

A:REG-D

< U1

Regulator Mode

> U2

1. Setpoint

>I

Act.Value
max. deviation

F1
F2

Strung

Lauflampe

< U1

Strung

Rckfhrung

> U2
F3

SS1

E-LAN

+10 %

ESC

MENU

St ufensch alter

l uft

a. eberle gmbh

ANA-D

255 subscribers may be addressed

double interface (E-LAN)

multimaster system structure


several bus topologies:

Auslsung
Leit ungsschalt er

>> U4

F5

AUTO

Regler

>> U3

0
F4

-10 %

Status

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos

258

COM1

cross linking example

E-LAN

T3

SS1

MENU

Modem

110 kV

20 kV

ESC

COM 1 or

approx. 5 Km

Progr. RS232

E-LAN
BOOSTER

SS2

COM1

COM2

SS1

E-LAN
BOOSTER

AUTO

COM 2

ESC

AUTO

COM1

>I

AUTO

Test

COM1

- open ring
- bus
- line to line

E-LAN

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
2-wire bus
REG - D

12:34:00

<U

Regulator Mode

>U

1. Setpoint

Note

F1

Tap-Changer Pos

F2
F3

0
F4

-10 %

+10 %
F5

ESC

BUS-L

COM1

MENU

BUS-R

b6
b8

AUTO

REG - D

12:34:00

<U

Regulator Mode

>U

1. Setpoint

>I

REG - D

REG-D

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D

Status

Act.Value
max. deviation
Tap-Changer Pos

F2

>U

1. Setpoint

Tap-Changer Pos

+10 %

REG - D
Status
<U
>U

1. Setpoint

>I

Act.Value
max. deviation
Tap-Changer Pos

F2

z6
z8

>U

1. Setpoint

Tap-Changer Pos

+10 %

ESC

AUTO

BUS-L

BUS-R

z6
z8

BUS-L

F5

COM1

MENU

COM1

MENU

BUS-R

z6
z8

ESC

F3
F4

-10 %

+10 %
F5

AUTO

F2

F4

-10 %

REG-D
F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation

>I

F3

12:34:00

<U

Regulator Mode

BUS-R

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D

Status

COM1

MENU

REG - D

REG-D
F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

BUS-L

b6
b8

2-wires
line to line

BUS-R

12:34:00

ESC

AUTO

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D
Regulator Mode

F5

COM1

MENU

z6
z8

b6
b8

BUS-L

ESC

F3
F4

-10 %

+10 %
F5

AUTO

F2

F4

-10 %

F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation

>I

F3

12:34:00

<U

Regulator Mode

REG-D

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D

Status

F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

E-LAN
Wiring
Example
All of the
devices
in the REGSys
computer family can be
connected to the bus.
REGSys components can be
identified by the D after the
hyphen.
Example: REG-D, PQI-D, EOR-D,
REG-DP, REG-DM, ...

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation

>I

REG-D

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D

Status

2-wires
line to line
REG - D
Status

12:34:00

<U
>U

1. Setpoint

>I

Tap-Changer Pos

Status

F1

AUTO
100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation

REG - D

REG-D

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D
Regulator Mode

<U
F2

>U
>I

F3

12:34:00

Regulator Mode
1. Setpoint

100.0 %
16.5 kV
16.8 kV
2.0 %

Act.Value
max. deviation
Tap-Changer Pos

-10 %

4-wires
line to line

BUS-L

ESC

b6
b8
b10
b12

AUTO

BUS-R

F3

0
+10 %
F5

COM1

z6
z8
z10
z12

BUS-L

b6
b8

AUTO

MENU

F2

F4

+10 %
F5

ESC

F1

AUTO

F4

-10 %

REG-D

a. eberle gmbh

A:REG-D

MENU

COM1

BUS-R

drawing suitable for LWL-transmission lengths


and RS485 Booster

REG - D Operating Manual

259

REG - D
Types of lines
Each of the E-LAN interfaces of a bus station can operate on a
2-wire line or on a 4-wire line (RS485). A 2-wire line is usually
selected because this is the only option which permits a bus
configuration with several bus stations on the same bus line.
The transmission line must be connected with a 100 resistor
at its beginning and end. Reflections can occur if the
terminating resistance is not present. These distort the signal,
increase the line damping and thus reduce the maximum
transmission distance of the line.
The terminating resistor is already integrated into the REG-D
and may be switched on and off via the operating panel
(termination).

Topology
The topology of the network, i.e. the connection of each bus
station to the bus, may be freely selected and combined.
The maximum permissible line length in the E-LAN is
determined by the transmission rate and by the line data. In the
RS485, the length is normally 1.2 km with a transmission rate
of 62.5 kBaud.
Only a 4-wire line can be used if a booster (same function as a
bus repeater) is installed to increase the permissible line length
(1.2 km). The necessary terminating resistors will then be
activated automatically (it is no longer necessary to select
termination).

Bus segment
Up to 16 bus devices can be connected to one bus station (a
line without boosters between the first and last device).
Up to 32 bus stations can be connected to one bus segment if
all of the spur-line connections are as short as possible and the
total loop resistance of the transmission line is < 100 Ohms.

Multimaster structure
The E-LAN has a multimaster structure, i.e. any bus station may
be declared to be the bus master.

260

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Each Relay on the bus works completely independently within
E-LAN and has access to all of the data of the other bus
stations.

Unique addressing
Each bus station on the E-LAN must be assigned a unique
address. 255 different, freely selectable addresses are
possible.
An address has the form: A, A1 ... A9, B, B1 ... B9, Z, Z1 ... Z4

Bus station index


Each bus station automatically generates an internal index of all
bus stations with valid addresses in the E-LAN.
Every three seconds, each bus station in the E-LAN sends a socalled broadcast message to all of the other bus subscribers so
that the latter can adapt their internal index accordingly.
If the broadcast message of a bus station is interrupted for
more than 20 seconds, the other bus stations will delete the
corresponding bus station from their internal index. A list of all
bus stations can be loaded via the operating panel.
The background program can be used to specify that the
omission of a bus station is indicated via a signal (relay, LED) or
a text message on the display.

REG - D Operating Manual

261

REG - D
16.9

Voltage regulation with parallel-switched


transformers

If parallel-switched transformers do not have same data (EMK,


uk, switching group), an additional current (reactive circulating
current) will permanently flow within this parallel-switching
circuit. This circulating current generates losses and is
independent of the load current and must therefore be avoided.

Regulation criteria
In the case of parallel-switching on a busbar, the terminal
voltage of all of the transformers even with different tapchange positions - is compulsorily set to the same amount. This
is why the voltage alone cannot be a regulation criteria for
transformers with different parameters. To be able to control
transformers switched in parallel on a busbar to the
correspondingly required voltage and to the same tap-change
position, the voltage regulation must be supplemented by a
circulating current regulation.
If all the transformers are the same, then stable parallelswitching can be achieved using the voltage and tap-changes
(master-slave, MSI).

Command variable
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
regulate the voltage on the undervoltage side (on the measuring
transformer) of each transformer to a common command
variable which depends on the sum current of the transformers
switched in parallel. It is assumed that the network is usually
loaded symmetrically, i.e. that the current intensity in each one
of the three phases is approximately the same.

Sum current (only relevant in the event of current influence)


All the transformer currents can be summed in one Relay by
crosslinking the REG-D Relays for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring of all the parallel-switched transformers
using one bus. This sum current and the selected gradient of
the Uf/IL characteristic line is the uniform base for the currentdependent influence of the command variable W for all Relays.
Due to the use of a normalised sum current, the gradient of the
Uf/IL characteristic can be set independently of the number and

262

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
different types of characteristic data of the parallel-transformers
(nominal power, short circuit voltage), so that changes in these
parameters do not require resetting the gradient Gnom.

16.9.1

Regulation programs
for transformers switched in parallel

The following procedures are available:

I sin procedure

(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin )

I sin (S) procedure

(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin


with different transformers))

Master-slave procedure (forced parallel operation, same


tap-change position)

cos procedure

(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin for


transformers that cannot communicate using E-LAN)

MSI - Master Slave Independent procedure

Parameters
Parameters determine the extent to which the parallel
regulation programs may affect regulation.
Different parameter menus are available depending on the type
of regulation program selected for the parallel-switching of the
transformers.

Influence of the circulating current regulation


Limitation of the influence of the circulating current
regulation

Setpoint value of the cos of the network (cos set)


Nominal power of the transformer
Transformer group list (addresses of Relays controlling
transformers operating in parallel on a busbar. These can
be activated via the menu or via a binary signal)
REG - D Operating Manual

263

REG - D
16.9.2

Functional principle

Minimisation of the reactive circulating current


The reactive component (Icirc sin ) of the circulating current
should ideally be zero or at least be minimised.
Since the voltage cannot be changed continuously (tapchanges occur in increments), it is generally not possible to
achieve the condition Icirc sin = 0.
To minimise the reactive component of the circulating current,
each Relay measures the reactive component I sin of the load
currents for each transformer of the group list, calculates the
reactive circulating current Icirc sin of the assigned
transformer and thus sets the tap-changer position in such a
way that this reactive circulating current is minimised.

16.9.3

Influence of the circulating current regulation

The size of the voltage change depends on the influence of the


circulating current regulation parameters as well as on their
degree of limitation. Larger permissible circulating currents (i.e.
influence of circulating current regulation is lower) cause the
precision of the circulating current regulation to be lowered
which could result in tap-change differences of more than one
tap-change.
Limitation of the influence of the circulating current regulation
Under normal operating conditions, the voltage regulation and
the circulating current regulation are independent of each other
(the limitation value of the influence of the circulating current
regulation lies far above the normal operation value).
Only under extreme conditions, including:

Parallel-switching operations of transformers with


previously different tap-change positions

Manual change of the tap-change position


cos -regulation for cos net cos set
can be regulated to achieve either optimal voltage stability or
optimal minimisation of the reactive circulating current. The user
chooses his/her priority by setting the respective parameters.
This means that if voltage regulation is to be given priority over
circulating current regulation, the influence of the circulating

264

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
current regulation can be limited to a minimum value which
must nevertheless be higher than zero.

16.9.4

Activation of the regulation program

Both the regulation program selected via the menu, and the
addresses of the transformers/Relays specified for parallelswitching are stored in a group list (SETUP 1, programs...,
Par. parameters...). The parallel-switching operation and its
reset are activated via a freely selectable binary input (SETUP 5,
Add-On 6).
The corresponding activation may be carried out via a pulse or
a high-level permanent signal.
A self-learning regulation program (Paragramer) is also available
through which the Relays on the E-LAN permanently check
which transformers are feeding on which busbar. The
transformer group list is constantly updated in accordance with
these results.
The ParProg parameter can be used to determine if a parallel
program is active or not and can be assigned to a freely
programmable LED or relay. An error in the regulation program
is indicated with ParErr or TapErr.
Further information can be found in chapter 9.

REG - D Operating Manual

265

REG - D
16.9.5

Description of the regulation programs

The I sin procedure


Functional principle:
The value of the reactive current should be the same value, IbA
= IbB = IbC = ... , for each of the parallel-switched transformers
A, B, C,... .
Area of application:
Parallel operation on a busbar with a maximum of 10
transformers with nearly equal nominal power, nearly equal
short circuit voltage and the same switching group.
The tap-change increments may differ and the cos in the
network can take any values requested.
Prerequisites:
The short circuit voltages, Uk of the parallel-switched
transformers should only differ by a small amount:
0.90 uk1 < uk2 < 1.10 uk1. The nominal powers should be
approximately equal.
The I sin [S] program is available when transformers with
different nominal powers are used.
Parameters to be entered:

Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in


the reactive circulating current Icirc sin = Ib** - Ib* per
tap-change of the assigned transformer)

Transformer group list (addresses of Relays, which can be


activated via the menu or via a binary signal, that control
parallel-switched transformers on a busbar)

Maximum tap difference between the transformers


(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)

266

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Permissible Icirc:
The correct value is derived as follows:

Set all of the transformers in the group list to the same tapchanger position (operation mode MANUAL) that causes
approx. the same terminal voltage. Then record the value of
reactive current (Ib = Isin = reactive component of load
curent)(Transducer mode). The value of the reactive current
must be approximately the same in all of the other
transformers.

Change each transformer successively by one tap-change


position.

The reactive current changes. The difference between the


new value (Ib** = 2nd measured value) and the old value (Ib*
= 1st measured value) is considered to be the 1st
approximation to the perm. Icirc.

Since the Relay is supposed to reset the transformer that was


changed by one level back to the previous tap-changer
position, the permissible circulating current (perm. Icirc) must be
set to a slightly lower value than the value found in the 1st
approximation.
i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (Ib** - Ib*).
Low values can produce oscillations in the regulation, in
particular when the transformers have different tap-changer
increments or different short circuit voltages.

ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to
the MANUAL operation mode.
To prevent the transformers from diverging, a max. tap
difference (SETUP 5, Add-On 6) can be entered that is
monitored in turn by the error flag ParErr.
If the set max. tap-change deviation is exceeded, the ParErr
error flag is set and the parallel-switching operation is switched
to the MANUAL operation mode providing that Sysctrl Bit 6
has been set.
REG - D Operating Manual

267

REG - D
Note

Bit 6 has been set on delivery!


Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallelswitching according to the I sin, I sin (S) und cos
current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tapchanger can nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because
the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the
current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tapchange position of the transformer.
TapErr
The TapErr error flag signals errors in the transmission of the
tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the
tap-changer. In thesin procedure, TapErr is only locally
effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay where the tap error has
occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapchanger position is not established within 1.5 x running time of
the tap-changer.
In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that
follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is
illogical, TapErr will be activated.

The following are considered to be tap errors:


1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay outputs a raise command and the
transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay
outputs a lower command and the transformer reacts with a
higher tap-change.

268

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the ratio in
the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change

Example:
The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-change position
does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap
position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay
interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr
flag is set.

Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
H 7=RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0
H 8=RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0

REG - D Operating Manual

269

REG - D
In place of the Upper tap limitation, enter the required upper tap
limitation and in place of the Lower tap limitation enter the
required lower tap limitation.

Note

The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,


and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

The I sin (S) procedure


Functional principle:
The relationship between the value of the reactive current and
the nominal power should be the same value IbA/SnA = IbB/SnB
= IbC/SnC = ... for each of the transformers A, B, C,... operated
in parallel!
Area of application:
Transformers with different nominal powers which feed via one
busbar in the network. Both the switching group as well as the
short circuit voltages of the transformers should be as equal as
possible because deviations may cause a different load
utilisation of the transformers.
Preconditions:
The permissible limits for different short circuit voltages are as
follows: 0.90 uk1 < uk2 < 1.10 uk1
Parameters to be entered:

Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in

the reactive circulating current Icirc sin = Ib** - Ib* per


tap-change of the assigned transformer; lb* = 1st measured
value, lb** = 2nd measured value). In the case of
transformers switched in parallel that have different nominal
powers, it is necessary to measure the permissible
circulating current for each transformer separately and to
enter it in the Relay.

Nominal power of the connected transformer.


270

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Transformer group list (addresses of Relays, which can be
activated via the PARAGRAMER menu or via a binary
signal, that control parallel-switched transformers on a
busbar)

Maximum tap difference between the transformers


(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)

Permissible Icirc:
The correct value is derived as follows:

Set all the transformers in the group list to the same tapchange position that causes approximately the same
terminal voltage (MANUAL operation mode), and record the
value of the reactive current Ib. The value of the reactive
current must be approximately the same for all the
transformers (see transducer mode).

Change each transformer successively by one tap-change


position.

The reactive current Ib changes. The difference between


the new value (Ib** = 2nd measured value) and the old value
(Ib* = 1st measured value) is considered to be the 1st
approximation to Icirc.

Since the Relay is supposed to then reset the transformer to the


previous tap-change position, the permissible circulating
current (permissible Icirc) must be set to the following value.
i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (lb** - lb*).
Low values might produce oscillations, in particular when the
transformers have different tap-change increments or different
short circuit voltages.

ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to
the MANUAL operation mode.

REG - D Operating Manual

271

REG - D
To prevent the transformers from diverging, a max. tap
difference (SETUP 5, Add-On 6) can be entered that is
monitored in turn by the error flag ParErr.
If the set max. tap-change deviation is exceeded, the ParErr
error flag is set and the parallel-switching operation is switched
to the MANUAL operation mode providing that Sysctrl Bit 6
has been set.
Note

Bit 6 has been set on delivery!


Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallelswitching according to the I sin, I sin (S) and cos
current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tapchange can nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because
the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the
current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tapchange position of the transformer.

TapErr
The error flag TapErr signals errors in the transmission of the
tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the
tap-changer. In thesin procedure, TapErr is only locally
effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay where the tap error has
occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapchange position is not established within 1.5 x running time of
the tap-change.
In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that
follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is
illogical, TapErr will be activated.

272

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay outputs a raise command and the
transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay
outputs a lower command and the transformer reacts with a
higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the ratio in
the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change

Example:
The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position
does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tapchange position after a raise or lower command is issued, the
Relay interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the
TapErr flag is set.

Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
REG - D Operating Manual

273

REG - D
H 7=RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0
H 8=RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0
In place of the Upper tap limitation, enter the required upper tap
limitation for your requirements and in place of the Lower tap
limitation enter the required lower tap limitation.

Note

The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,


and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

Master-Slave procedure
This procedure is suitable for transformers with the same
nominal power, the same tap-change position and the same
tap-changer increments.
After the parallel-switching operation has been activated, the
master will regulate the slave, or - in the master-slave cycle - the
slaves, to the tap-change position which it itself is in. It then
switches to master-slave mode which causes all of the
transformers involved in the parallel-switching operation to
change taps simultaneously.
In the master-slave mode, the slaves do not become slaves
until they have reached the same tap-change position as the
master.
As long as they are not in the same tap-change position, they
remain in the slave mode.
This differentiation and/or change can also be followed in the
status line of the Relay.
The precondition for the master-slave procedure is that each
Relay must be fed the present tap-change position of its
transformer by means of a BCD, binary or mA signal.
Further prerequisites for using the MSI procedure:
Only transformer types with identical electrical (output, short
circuit voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions,
switching groups, etc.) and mechanical features (number of
tap-change positions, position of the deadband) are suitable for
MSI operation.

274

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
A different procedure should be used if one or more of the
parameters differ.
In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay receives the
information regarding the tap-change position of its
transformer.
The recording and transmission of the correct tap-change
position is one of the mandatory prerequisites of the masterslave tap-change equalisation procedure.
Every potential candidate must be listed in the group list with
its address in order to notify the system of the number of
Relays/transformers that should take part in parallel operation.
Moreover, the tap-change of each Relay involved in the parallelswitching operation must be switched on (menu SETUP 5,
Add-On 1, F4) before the parallel-switching operation is
activated.
The MSI (master-slave-independent procedure) is a special
version of the master-slave program (see Parallel operation
using the Master-Slave-Independent (MSI) procedure on
page 170).
Parameters to be entered:

Transformer group list


Selection of activation, see chapter 9.
For operating the master-slave procedure it is mandatory that
the tap-change position is signalled correctly. For this reason,
error flags have been developed which immediately recognise
errors and then set the regulation to the MANUAL operation
mode if necessary.

TapErr
In the master-slave procedure, TapErr affects the entire group.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the error flag TapErr is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapchanger position is not established within 1.5 x tap-changer
REG - D Operating Manual

275

REG - D
runtime. In this case the entire group will be switched from
AUTOMATIC to MANUAL.
In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that
follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is
illogical, TapErr will be activated.

The following are considered to be tap errors:


1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay outputs a raise command and the
transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay
outputs a lower command and the transformer reacts with a
higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the
transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus
lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change

Example:
The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position
does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap
position after a raise of lower command is issued, the Relay

276

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr
flag is set.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.

ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to
the MANUAL operation mode.
ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two
transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the
specified permissible difference.
An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not
desired. Otherwise only the Relay that carried out the tapchange that lead to the permissible maximum tap difference
being exceed will be switched over to the manual operation
mode.
Note

If you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company


headquarters.

The cos procedure


Functional principle:
By means of the set cos set, the ratio between the active
current I cos and the reactive current I sin of the transformer
(load currents) is set to the required value. Regulation is
executed in such a way that the cos of the transformer is
regulated to the set value cos set.
The cos of the network is set on the Relay. The Relay should
ideally keep this value constant. The constancy of the cos net
value is the gauge of quality of the regulation. Deviations from
the set value negatively affect the regulation results because
there is a small voltage change when cos net cos set
(inequality between the current value of the cos of the
network and the set cos set).
REG - D Operating Manual

277

REG - D
Area of application:
Transformers which are feeding on one network independently
of each other and for which there is no bus link between the
assigned Relays.
Parameters to be entered:

Permissible reactive current difference > 0.6 x (lb** - lb*)


Limitation of the influence of the circulating current
regulation

Setpoint value of the cos of the network (cos set)


Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallelswitching according to the I sin, I sin (S) and cos
current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tapchanger can nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because
the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the
current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tapchange position of the transformer.

TapErr
TapErr is only effective locally, that is it only affects the Relay
where the tap error has occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that
follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is
illogical, TapErr will be activated.

278

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay outputs a raise command and the
transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay
outputs a lower command and the transformer reacts with a
higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the
transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus
lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change

Example:
The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-change position
does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If the next higher or lower tap-change position is not signalled
back after the tap-change position has been raised or lowered,
the Relay interprets the position check-back signal as being
defective and sets the error flag TapErr.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position check-back signal making it easier to rectify the error.

REG - D Operating Manual

279

REG - D
The cos emergency program
Functional principle:
In order to keep the circulating current regulation stable, even
during bus faults (E-LAN), an emergency program is
incorporated in the I sin and I sin (S) programs. This
program is activated as soon as the Relay recognises a bus
error (E-LAN - Error). All Relays connected to the E-LAN will
return to their previous program 10 seconds after the bus error
has been eliminated.
The cos program is used as an emergency program,
whereby the regulation is not carried out to the entered cos set
but to the last current
cos Sum** of the system that was measured by the Relay (Sum
= angle between the sum current and the line voltage). Thus the
voltage regulation is not affected and the parallel operation of
the transformers also remains stable.
If the cos Sum of the network changes (an event that usually
occurs only slowly, not suddenly), the line voltage changes only
slightly, because the Relay tries to find a compromise between
the minimum difference of the measured cos Sum* of the
network and the current cosSum** of the network as well as the
minimum difference between the command variable W and the
actual value X of the voltage. This ensures that the parallel
operation of the transformers remains stable.

280

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
16.10 Nominal transformation of the measuring
transformers
The decisive factors for the nominal transformation ratio Kn of
a measuring transformer are the nominal value X1n of the
primary factor and the nominal value X2n of the secondary
factor.

1nKn = X
---------X 2n
Knu = nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers
Kni = nominal transformation ratio of the current transformers

Nominal transformation of current transformers


Example:
X 1n = 1000 A
X 2n = 5 A
A- = 200
Kni = 1000
----------------5A

Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers


Example:
X1n = 110 kV
X 2n = 100 V
kV- 100
V- = 110
kV- = 1100
---------------------------------------------Knu = 110
100 V
3
3

REG - D Operating Manual

281

REG - D
16.11 Self-conduct
Each active control level of the Relay (MANUAL/ AUTOMATIC)
maintains its status even after a failure of the auxiliary voltage.
If the auxiliary voltage is interrupted, the WITH self-conduct
setting causes the Relay to continue running in the
AUTOMATIC operation mode after the event; this is only
possible if the Relay was operating in the AUTOMATIC
operation mode before the malfunction occurred.
In the situation mentioned above, the WITHOUT self-conduct
setting would cause the Relay to continue operating in the
MANUAL operation mode after the event.

16.12 LCD display


16.12.1 LCD contrast
The contrast can be changed (see LCD contrast (display) on
page 89).

16.12.2 LCD saver


The LCD display switches off after 1 hour.

16.12.3 Background illumination


The background illumination switches off 15 minutes after the
keypad was last used.
Pressing any key switches the background illumination on
again.

282

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
17

Definition of the Abbreviations

Abbreviation

Definition

OFF

OFF

Trigger

Trigger
The Relay stops further regulation until the
limit value violation has been rectified

AUTO

Automatic operation

Triple-wound

Triple-wound application

ELAN Err

E-LAN error (error on bus)

ELAN-L

E-LAN left

ELAN-R

E-LAN right

up/down

LED indicates raise or lower, when control


command is given.

InputErr

Input-Error
If the setpoint value change (SW1 to SW2) is
carried out at the binary input, InputErr will
become active if both signals are there at the
same time.
The Relay retains the old value and displays
InputErr.

TC-Err+

Temporary signal when tap-changer running


time is exceeded

TC-Err.

Permanent signal when the tap-changer


running time is exceeded

TC. i. Op

Maximum time TC in operation lamp


The time the motor drive requires to change
from one tap to the next

LDC

Line drop compensation

Par-Prog

Parallel program activated or not activated

REG - D Operating Manual

283

REG - D
Abbreviation

Definition

ParErr

ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in


general (parallel error) and automatically
switches a group of transformers operating in
parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation
mode to the MANUAL operation mode.
If this behaviour is not desired, a different
type of behaviour can be selected via the
SysCtrl feature. In this case please contact
our headquarters.
ParrErr functions in different ways in the
different parallel programs (See Description
of the regulation procedure on page see
Description of the regulation programs on
page 266).

284

TapErr

TapErr is a signal that indicates a problem


with the tap-change position. The name is
derived from the term tap error.
Unlike ParErr, Tap Err is only effective locally,
i.e. it is only indicated on the Relay on which
the tap-changer position error has occurred.
It can also switch the group working in
parallel to MANUAL when operating in the
master-slave or MSI procedure.

LEVEL

Level-controlled

PROG

Function triggered by background program

creepNBD

Creeping net breakdown

Quick

High-speed switching
The Relay switches in the quickest possible
time within the tolerance band.

Inh. Low

Setting to a standstill
The Relay stops all further regulation until the
limit value violation has been rectified

SP-1

Setpoint value 1

SP-2

Setpoint value 2

SP-3

Setpoint value 3

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Abbreviation

Definition

SP-4

Setpoint value 4

SP-decr.

Decrease setpoint value via the binary input


(lower)

SP-incr.

Increase setpoint value via the binary input


(raise)

SP2Level

Level-controlled switching to setpoint value 2

Trans1
/Trans1

Transit channel 1
Binary input signal can be handed over to a
relay (Rel 3 ... Rel 5).
Examples:
BE 1 on Trans 1
Rel 3 on Trans 1
BE 1 = 1

BE 1 = 0

REL 3 = 1
REL 3 = 0

BE 1 on Trans 1
Rel 3 on /Trans 1

BE 1 = 1

BE 1 = 0

REL 3 = 0
REL 3 = 1

Trans2
/Trans2

See Trans1

PG_CB

Paragramer, low-voltage side


Circuit breaker

PG_IS1

Paragramer, low-voltage side,


Disconnector 1

PG_IS2

Paragramer, low-voltage side,


Disconnector 2

PG_CP

Paragramer, low-voltage side,


Bus Coupling

PG_SC1

Paragramer, low-voltage side,


Bus tie 1

PG_SC2

Paragramer, low-voltage side,


Bus tie 2

REG - D Operating Manual

285

REG - D

286

Abbreviation

Definition

PG_H_CB

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Circuit breaker

PG_H_IS1

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Disconnector 1

PG_H_IS2

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Disconnector 2

PG_H_CP

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Bus Coupling

PG_H_SC1

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Bus tie 1

PG_H_SC2

Paragramer, high-voltage side,


Bus tie 2

BCD1

BCD/BIN code, value 1

BCD2

BCD/BIN code, value 2

BCD4

BCD/BIN code, value 4

BCD8

BCD/BIN code, value 8

BCD10

BCD/BIN code, value 10

BCD20

BCD/BIN code, value 20

BCDminus

BCD/BIN code, - sign

BIN16

BIN code, value 16

BIN32

BIN code, value 32

PANmiss

Set if associated PAN - D is not available

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Abbreviation

Definition

LR_AH

Local/remote operation together with the


REG_LR device will be activated as soon as
the input functions LR_AH and LR_STAT are
used. These inputs are connected with the
corresponding outputs of the REG_LR
device. As long as the REG_LR device holds
the status line LR_STAT active (1), the AUTO/
MANUAL status of the Relay will be
determined by the input LR_AH (1:AUTO,
0:MANUAL). Raise/lower commands may
only come from the Relay drive (in the case
of AUTO). As soon as the status of the
REG_LR device falls (0), the Relay will revert
to the AUTO/MANUAL operation mode
which applied 1s before the drop in the
LR_STAT signal. The Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will then
continue to work as usual.
Special case: LR_STAT is not used, i.e. only
the input function LR_AH is activated. In this
case, it is always assumed that LR_STAT is
active.

LR_STAT

If only the LR_STATUS input function is used,


the following applies:
LR_STAT active (1):
Remote operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and
raise/lower only via inputs or REG-L.
LR_STAT inactive (0):
Local operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and
raise/lower only via the keypad.

COM2ACT

Outputs a 1 s signal as a pulse (relay) or lights


the LED every 60 s

T60s/1s

Gives information about the status of the


COM 2 (1: busy, 0: not busy)

REG - D Operating Manual

287

REG - D
Note

Further parameters and hence abbreviations are


required in certain circumstances depending on the
additionally selected features (e.g. TMM01/02).
The descriptions of the statuses will be delivered with
the appropriate operating manual update.

288

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
18

Symbols and their Definition

Symbol

Definition

> I [%]

Upper limit value of the current


(of the transformer)

< I [%]

Lower limit value of the current


(of the transformer)

> U [%]

Upper limit value of the voltage


(of the transformer)

< U [%]

Lower limit value of the voltage


(of the transformer)

I [A]

Difference between 2 current values

U [V]

Difference between 2 voltage levels

AA1 ... AA4

Analogue output (mA)

AE1 ... AE4

Analogue input (mA)

BA1 ... BA4

Binary output
(USt. : 10 V ... 50 V)

E1 ... E16

Binary input
(USt. : 48 V ... 230 V)

Ft [1]

Time factor for time behaviour


of the Relay

I1n [A]

Nominal value of the primary


current transformer
(of the transformer)

I2n [A]

Nominal value of the secondary


current transformer
(of the transformer)

Icirc [A]

Circulating current in parallelswitched transformers

Icirc sin [A]

Reactive component of the


circulating current Icirc

I [A]

Deliverd load current


of the transformer

I sin = Ib [A]

Reactive component of the load


current
(short reactive current Ib)

REG - D Operating Manual

289

REG - D

290

Symbol

Definition

Kni [1]

Ratio of the current transformer

Knu [1]

Ratio of the voltage transformer (of


the transformer)

R1 ... R8

Relay outputs

S [VA]

Apparent power

Sn [VA]

Nominal power of the transformer

St [%]

Gradient of the Uf/I characteristic


line

Gnom [%]

Nominal value of the gradient


of the Uf/I characteristic line

tb [s]

Basic time; standard value for


tb = 30 s for Xwb = 1 %

tV [s]

Reaction delay of a control


command

U1n [kV]

Nominal value of the primary


voltage transformer

U2n [V]

Nominal value of the secondary


voltage transformer

Uf [V]

Voltage drop (amount) on the


line

Uf [V]

Voltage drop (pointer) on the


line

Uact

Actual value of the voltage

uk [%]

Short-circuit voltage of the


transformer; component of the
nominal voltage, which operates in
the nominal current in the shortcircuited secondary winding

Uset

Setpoint value of the voltage

UT [V]

Voltage at the transformer


(r.m.s value)

UV [V]

Voltage at the consumer


(r.m.s value)

W [V]

Command variable (XR + XK)

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Symbol

Definition

X [V]

Present value of the command


variable
(of the voltage)

X0

Reference value for limit values


(setpoint value or 100/110 V)

Xd [V, %]

Regulation difference (negative


regulative deviation: Xd = - Xw)

XK [V]

Correction quantity (Uf)

XR [V]

Setpoint value, set on the Relay

XR100 [V]:

Setpoint that is defined as the


100% value.

Xw [%] (relative)

Regulative deviation
[(X - W) / W] 100 %

Xw [V] (absolute)

Regulative deviation (X - W)

Xwb [%]

Rated relative regulative deviation;


control commands are activated
when Xwb = 1%

Xwz [%]

Permissible regulative deviation, set


on the Relay; indication in n% in
relation to W

Y [1]

Correcting variable 1 tap

Yh [1]

Setting range
Number of tap-changes

Z [V]

Influencing variable

REG - D Operating Manual

291

REG - D
19

Parameters

Parameters

292

Factory
Setting

Setting
Range

Reference

Trigger

125.0 V

100 V ... 150 V

Actual value
correction voltage

0.0

-20% ... +20%

Unom

Actual value
correction current

0.0

-20% ... +20%

Inom

Kni

1.00

0.01 ... 10000

Knu

1.00

0.01 ... 4000

Regulative deviation, 2%
permissible

0.1% ... 10%

Setpoint
value

Backward highspeed switching

10.0%

0% ... +35%

Setpoint
value

Forward high-speed
switching

-10.0%

-35% ... 0%

Setpoint
value

Setpoint value

100 V

60 V ... 140 V

Gradient

0.0%

0% ... 40%

Inhibit Low

-25%

-75% ... 0%

Setpoint
value or
100/110 V

Undervoltage < U

-10.0%

-25% ... +10%

Setpoint
value or
100/110 V

Overvoltage > U

10%

0% ... + 25%

Setpoint
value or
100/110 V

>I

100.0%

0% ... 210%

Inom
1A/5A

<I

0.0%

0% ... 100%

Inom
1A/5A

Time factor

1.0

0.1 ... 30

Trigger time

0s

0 ... 999 s

Backward high0s
speed switching time

0 ... 999 s

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
Parameters

Factory
Setting

Setting
Range

Reference

Forward high-speed
switching time

2s

2 ... 999 s

Inhibit low time

0s

0 ... 999 s

Undervoltage time

0s

0 ... 999 s

Overvoltage time

0s

0 ... 999 s

Time > I, < I

0s

0 ... 999 s

REG - D Operating Manual

293

REG - D
20

Notes on the Interpreter Language

Notes on the Interpreter Language REG-L (REG-Language) can


be ordered separately or can be downloaded from our website
www.a-eberle.de or
www.regsys.de
Furthermore, all help texts may be displayed directly on the
Relay using a terminal program (? ).

294

REG - D Operating Manual

REG - D
21

Index

Symbols

++ symbols 146

Background illumination 282


Background information 221
Background program 95, 138, 140, 142,
222, 236, 261, 284
Backward high-speed switching 114, 292
Backward high-speed switching time 292
Band boundaries 251
Band violation 251
Basic settings 87
Basic time 245, 290
Battery 218
Battery status 99
Baud rate 211
Baudrate 209
BCD coding 32, 122
Binary outputs 22, 236
Block diagram 20
Booster 97, 260
Broadcast Message 261
Bus 258
Bus configuration 96
Bus device index 261
Bus error 148
Bus errors 280
Bus left 96
Bus line 96
Bus link 278
Bus repeater 258
Bus right 96
Bus segment 260
Bus station 258, 260, 261
Busbar 221, 262, 263, 265, 266, 271
Busbar replica 54

Numbers
1. Setpoint 105
100% value 105
2. Setpoint 106
24 hour load curve 257
2-wire line 96, 260
3 conductor circuit 184
4-wire line 260
4-wire transmission technology (RS485)
96

A
Abbreviations 283
Absolute limits 239
Active component 224
Active current 277
Actual value 48, 221
Actual value correction current 292
Actual value correction voltage 292
Actuator 221
Add-Ons 118
Addresses (A ... Z4) 87
Addressing 261
Adjuisting the setpoint 222
Analogue channels 198
Analogue input 289
Analogue module 33
Analogue output 289
Angle 132, 224
Angle difference 225
Apparent power 290
Application menu 184
ARON circuit 49, 132
AUTO 45, 283
Automatic 283
Auxiliary voltage 9, 28
Auxilliary voltage failure 123, 282
Operating Manual REG - D

C
Calming of the network 242
Cause of fault 235
Channel display 55
Characteristic line 226, 227, 246
Circuit breakers 152

295

REG - D
Circulating current 262, 264, 266, 289
Circulating current regulation 262, 263,
264, 278, 280
COM 1 35, 93
COM 2 33, 94
COM 3 33
Command variable 221, 222, 225, 245,
262, 280, 290
Compromise 280
Condensation 220
Connection diagram 14, 150
Consumer 223
Continuous message 120
Contrast 282
Control 221
Control command 240
Control Influence 108
Control level 282
Control procedure 250
Control quality 221
Control system 94
Controlled system 221
Controlling the tap-changer 46
Correction quantity 223, 291
Coupling 171
Couplings 152
Creeping Net Breakdown
Recognition 128
Creeping net breakdown 128, 242, 284
Lock Time 128
Number of Changes 129
Time slice 129
creepNBD 284
Crosslink 54
Crosslinking 262
Current Display 123
Current influence 110, 262
Current loop 185
Current range 135
Current source 185
Current strength 223
Current transformer 223, 227, 289
Current-dependent influencing 262

296

D
Data transfer. 214
Date 55
DCF77 94
cos - procedure 263
cos emergency program 280
cos procedure 277
Deadband 221
Delete total number of tap-changes 91
Deleting Passwords 90
Demo mode 58
I sin - procedure 263
I sin (S) - procedure 263
I sin (S) procedure 270
I sin procedure 266
Difference 280, 289
Dimensions 12
Direction of the active power 226
Disconnector 152
Display modes 45, 48
Recorder mode 48
Regulator mode 48
Statistics mode 48
Transducer mode 48
Dual display 51, 55

E
Earthing clamp 36
Editing of the signal 235
E-LAN 33, 96, 258, 265, 280
ELAN Err 283
E-LAN error 127
E-LAN error (error on bus) 283
E-LAN interfaces 96
E-LAN left 283
E-LAN right 283
ELAN-L 283
ELAN-R 283
Emergency program 280
Equalisation of the tap-change positions
178
Error detection 185
Error flags 181, 267, 272
Exceeding the measurement range 185
Operating Manual REG - D

REG - D
F
Fault signals 55
Faults 235
Feature K1 172
Feature M+ 128
Feature M2 49, 132
Feedback effect 135
Feeding point 53
Feedrate speed 51, 57
Firmware-Version 99, 151
Fluctuation range 233
Fluctuations in the line voltage 233
Forward high-speed switching 114, 292
Forward high-speed switching time 293
Front panel 12
Full load 228, 229
Function keys 45
Fuse 9
Fuse selection 219

Gradient 111, 223, 228, 229, 262, 290,


292
Gradient and limitation 110
Group list 109, 173, 264, 266, 275
Guide 36
Guide value for Xwz 234

H
Hardware handshake 209
Harmonics 135
Hexadecimal number 99
higher-level systems 94
High-speed switching 240, 284
High-speed switching when undervoltage/
overvoltage occurs 114
How to change fuses 218
Humidity 220
Hyperbolic characteristic curve 247, 248

I
I Current limit 112
ID data of the REG-D regulator 99
Illogical tap changes 183
Operating Manual REG - D

Illogical tap-changes 269, 273, 276, 279


Increments in the wrong direction 182
Inh. Low 284
Inhibit low 239, 241, 284, 292
Inhibit low time 293
Input assignments 138
Input channel 138
Input quantity 236
InputErr 283
Integrating time programs 250
Integrator 221, 233
Interfaces 33

J
Jumper 135

K
Kni 292
Knu 292

L
Lamp check 54
Language selection 125
LCD contrast 89, 282
LCD display 44, 282
LCD Display Recorder Mode 44
LCD Saver 282
LCD saver 124
LDC 283
LDC-Parameter R 110
LDC-Parameter X 110
LED 283
LED assignments 141
LEDs 43, 45
LEVEL 284
Level detection 185
Level-controlled activation 157
Level-controlled switching 285
Limit base 129
Limit signal 236
limit signal 236
Limit signal <I 238
Limit signal >I 238
Limit signal >U 237

297

REG - D
Limit signal trigger 236
Limit value 289
Limit value violation 236
Limitation 108, 111, 227
Limit-value transmiter <U 238
Line data 260
Line drop compensation 224, 283
Line length 260
Line resistance 92
Line voltage 221, 280
Lineare characteristic line 249
Load 223
Load changes 251
Load current 222, 262, 289
Load point 224, 225
Load situation 251
Loading procedure 252
Local 45
Lock control command 23
Lock Time 242
Locking filter 135
LOGBOOK memory 101
Loop resistance 260
LOWER 236

Measuring voltage UE 28
Medium voltage networks 243
Membrane keypad 43
Memory 51
MENU 46
Menu selection 47
Minimisation of the reactive circulating current 264
MMU display 55
Monitoring algorithm 178
Monitoring of extreme operation values
235
Monitoring tasks 235
Monitoring the tap-changer 244
Motor drive 120
Motor protection switch-off 140
Mounting rack 36
MSI 170, 172
MSI_Ind 174
MSI_Ma 174
MSI_Sl 174
Multimaster 258
Multimaster structure 260

N
M
Maintenance 217
Maintenance and repair works 10
Manual (M) 45
Manual/Automatic 22, 121
Bistable switching behaviour 121
Flip/Flop switching behaviour 121
Master (M) 170
Master-Slave independent 170
Master-Slave procedure 170, 263, 274
Maximum tap difference 130
Maximum tap-change difference 244
Maximum TC lamp time 240
Maximum time TC in operation 120
Measurement quantity 243
Measurement Value Simulation 46
Measurement value simulation 143
Measuring circuit 219
Measuring current (AC) I 29
Measuring transformers 281

298

Net-cos 109
NO contact 22
No increment 183
No tap-change 269, 273, 276, 279
Nominal power 263, 266, 270
Nominal power of the transformer 109,
263
Nominal transformation 281
Nominal transformation of measuring
transformers 281
Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage
transformers 281
Nominal translation of current transformers
281
Nominal value of the gradient 227
Nominal voltage 227, 229
Non-fused earthed conductor 9
Number of changes 221, 233

Operating Manual REG - D

REG - D
O
OFF 283
Open ring 258
Operating panel 260
Operation control elements 43
Operation mode 176
Operation Principle 47
Oscillations 267, 271
Output 221
Output level 258
Overvoltage 112, 292
Overvoltage time 293

PAN-D 98, 213


PAN-D Voltage Monitoring Unit 98
PAN-D voltage monitoring unit 98
Paragramer 53
Parallel operation 280
Parallel program 107, 130, 283
Parallel program activation 126
Parallel regulation program 263
Parallel switching 147, 150, 170, 262,
265
Parallel transformer regulation 107
Parallel-switching of transformers 263
Parameter for parallel program 108
Parameter menus 108
Parameterisation 45, 102
Parameters 292
ParErr 181, 284
Par-Prog 283
Password 90, 91
Password request 90, 91
Past values 51
People-process-communication (MPK) 43
Permanent signal 265, 283
Permissible circulating currents 264
Permissible Icirc 267
Permissible regulative deviation 48, 103,
233, 234
Phase voltage 132
Pin assignment 20
Place number 36
Operating Manual REG - D

Plausibility 236
Plug-in modules 12
Configuration 12
Degree of protection 12
Height 12
Location of blade connectors 13
Location of socket connectors 13
Picture dimensions 12
Plug-in connector 12
Weight 12
Width 12
Pointers 225
Position of the deadband 173, 274
Primary side 228
Primary value 105
Primary voltage 222, 251
Procedure for determining measurement
values 247
PROG 284
Programming and parameterisation software 11
Programs 107
Progress bar 252
Pulse-controlled activation 157

Q
Quasi-analogue scale 50
Quick 284

r.m.s. value 224, 290


RAISE 237
Rating factor 245
Reactance 224
Reaction delay 240, 247
Reaction time 245
Reactive circulating current 262, 263,
264, 266
Reactive component of circulating current
264
Reactive component of the load current
267
Reactive current 266, 267, 271, 277, 289
Reactive current difference 278

299

REG - D
Record 258
Recorder display 51
Recorder mode 51
Reference value 291
Reference value for the limit values 239
Reflections 260
REG-5A/E 248
REG-D current consumption 219
REG-IN1 99
REG-IN2 100
REG-L 236
Regulating procedure 147
Regulating quantity 233, 291
Regulation behaviour time factor 103
Regulation criteria 262
Regulation difference 233, 291
Regulation program 263, 265, 266
Regulation result 277
Regulative deviation 48, 221, 233, 234,
242, 245, 291, 292
Regulator mode large display 124
Relative humidity 220
Relative Limits 239
Relay 22
Relay assignments 139
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage
occurs 115
Relay outputs 290
Remote 45
Repeater 258
Resetting Fault Signals 55
Resetting the measured value memory 91
Resetting the tap-counter 91
Resistance input 184
Resistance measurement equipment 184
Reulation behaviour 103
Rotating memory 101
Running time exceeded 283
Running time of the motor drive 120

S
Safety regulations 9
Scale section 57
Scope of delivery 11

300

Secondary factor 281


Secondary side 228
Secondary value 105
Secondary winding 290
Self-Conduction of the Operation Mode
WITH 123
Self-conduction of the operation mode
123
WITHOUT 123
Set of curves 248
Setpoint 48, 105, 127
Setpoint adjustment 127
Setpoint deviation 48
Setpoint value 221, 222, 228, 229, 285,
292
Setpoint value 1 284
Setpoint value 2 284
Setpoint value 3 284
Setpoint value 4 285
Setpoint value correction 234
Setpoint value reduction 229
Setting inhibit low if I 130
Setting values 229
Settings recommendation 254
Setup menu 54
Short circuit voltage 263, 266, 267, 270,
271, 290
Short-form operating manual 11
Signal level 97
Simulated current 145
Simulated phase angle 145
Simulated tap-change 146
Simulated voltage 145
Simulation mode 144
Simulation time 144
Simulator for the quantities U, I, and j 144
Slave (S) 170
Small voltage deviations 245
SP-1 284
SP-2 284
SP2Level 285
SP-3 284
SP-4 285
SP-decr. 285
SP-incr. 285
Operating Manual REG - D

REG - D
Spur line lengths 260
Standard value 290
Standard version 28
Standby mode 171
Start bootstrap loader 211
Station ID 87
Station name 88
Statistics mode 53
Status 22, 45, 99
Storage 218, 220
Sum current 262, 280
Switching difference 236
Switching hysteresis 236
Switching operations 151
Switching problems 178
Switching status 160
Switching statuses 54, 152
Switching time delay 235, 246
Switching to a setpoint value 222, 283
Symbols 289
Synchronising the time 94
System identification 99

Tap-change 48, 122, 234, 262, 264


OFF 122
Tap-change adjustment 151
Tap-change command 251
Tap-change difference 264
Tap-change equalisation procedure 170
Tap-change in operation lamp 283
Tap-change operation 250
Tap-change procedure 221
Tap-change signal 269, 273, 277, 279
Tap-change voltage 221
Tap-changer 221, 235, 240, 241, 244
Tap-changer drives 240
Tap-changer in operation time 240
Tap-changer running time 283
Tap-changes in the wrong direction 268,
273, 276, 279
Tap-changes under load 53
Tap-changing transformer 48, 222
TapErr 181, 284
TC. i. Op 283
Operating Manual REG - D

TC-Err+ 283
TC-Err. 283
Technical data 12
Telegram length 258
Temperature range 220
Temporary message 120
Temporary signal 283
Terminal voltage 262
Terminate 97
Terminating resistor 96, 260
Three-tap-change regulator 221
Time 55, 89
Time > I 293
Time axis 52
Time behaviour 103, 104, 221, 245
Time delay
< U 116
> I, < I limit value 116
> U 115
Backward high-speed switching 117
Forward high-speed switching 117
Inhibit low 118
Trigger 116
Time factor 103, 245, 257, 292
Time program 104
Time range 51
Time reference line 55
Time search 55
Time sequence 240
Tolerance band 51, 233, 245
Topology 260
Trans 285
Transducer mode 49
Transformer 151, 221, 229, 234
Transformer configuration 150
Transformer group list 263, 265
Transformer mounting 131
Current 134
Current (conversion 1 A / 5 A) 135
Current transformer mounting ratio
137
Voltage 132
Voltage transformer ratio 134
Transformer ratio 290
Transformer tap-change position 234

301

REG - D
Transit channel 285
Transmission lengths 97
Transmission line 260
Transmission rate 258, 260
Trend memory 104, 251
Trigger 113, 283, 292
Trigger time 292
Triple-wound application 283
Trouble-shooting 181
Types of lines 260

Wire jumper 22, 23

Z
Zero modem cable 209

U
Uf/I characteristic line 290
Undervoltage 111, 292
Undervoltage side 262
Undervoltage time 293
Unit time 250
Up/down 283
Update of the operating software 209
User 90

Variable command variable 222, 223


V-circuit 28
Voltage band 250
Voltage change 228
Voltage deviation 250
Voltage difference 224
Voltage drop 221, 222, 223, 224, 225,
290
Voltage measurement input 185
Voltage pointer 224
Voltage regulation 262, 264
Voltage return 123
Voltage stability 264
Voltage transformer 28
Voltage transformer ratio 131
Voltage value 55
Voltage-time diagram 55

W
Warnings and Notes 9
Weak load 228, 229
WinREG 11, 58, 88, 143, 174, 258

302

Operating Manual REG - D

L1
L2
L3

UH

R6

R5

R4

b
z

UE

24

22

20

z
b

R2

b
z

R2

b
z

E7

b
4

28 32 30

8 10 12

REG-D
BUS-L

BUS-R

PAN-D

R13

E5
+ -

E4
+ -

E6
+ -

E7
+ -

z
6

E2
+ -

R8

E3
+ -

Binary - Outputs 230 V

R9

R10

Messages

R11

16 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 8

E8
+ -

R12

E8

b
2

z
2

R14

8 10 10 12 12 14 14 16 16

E6

COM 2

32 30 30 28 26 26 24 22 22 20 18 18 16 14 14 12 10 10 8

6
b

E5

UH

z
6

z
4

Inputs
E4

COM 3

b
20 22 24 20 22 24

R1

UH

E3

6
b

E2

b
30 32 30 32

z
2

E1

R6

Outputs

R5

BUS-R

8 10 14 14 16 16 20 20 22 24 22

R4

R3

Outputs

6
z
8 10 12

b
6

4 10 8

8 10 4

b
2

(Rel 3 and 4 in release condition U1<UE<U2)

R3

R1

24 26 20 20 16 16 14 14 10 8

22

20

setting command lock

free

lower

BUS-L

High-speed

L(-)

free

switching

30

free

REG-D

free

8 10 12

Hand/Auto.

U4

32

free

higher

free

Standstill

>U2

L1
L2
L3

lower

High-speed switching

<U1

L(+)

higher

free configurable

interference

28

emergency
stop

Hand (H)

Automatic (A/H)

regulator

higher
L(+)

trigger
L(-)

lower
U3

free configurable
2

E1
+ -

R7

tapchanger

REG - D Operating Manual


interference

Activity lamp

M
3~

UH

L1
L2
L3
N

22

Activity lamp

PAN-D
BUS-R

REG - D
Appendix

303